U.S. patent application number 11/913189 was filed with the patent office on 2008-10-16 for package assembly for multi-modality sensation chewing gum compositions.
This patent application is currently assigned to CADBURY ADAMS USA LLC. Invention is credited to Scott Allison, Navroz Boghani, Petros Gebreselassie, R. Steve Grant, Bharat Jani, Kishor Kabse, Jesse Kiefer, Colleen Kramer, Thomas Kuncewitch, Mary K. Robinson, Kristen Schmitz.
Application Number | 20080255938 11/913189 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 35355590 |
Filed Date | 2008-10-16 |
United States Patent
Application |
20080255938 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Jani; Bharat ; et
al. |
October 16, 2008 |
Package Assembly for Multi-Modality Sensation Chewing Gum
Compositions
Abstract
A package assembly for a multi-layer center-filled chewing gum
is disclosed. The package assembly supports individual gum pieces
that have a center surrounded by a gum region. The gum region may
include a gum base. Optionally, the individual gum pieces may be
further coated with an external coating layer. Components of the
individual gum pieces create a duality, such as a dual sensation
perception, that are identified by indicia on the package.
Inventors: |
Jani; Bharat; (East
Brunswick, NJ) ; Kabse; Kishor; (Morris Plains,
NJ) ; Boghani; Navroz; (Flanders, NJ) ;
Gebreselassie; Petros; (Piscataway, NJ) ; Grant; R.
Steve; (Chester, NJ) ; Kiefer; Jesse;
(Columbia, NJ) ; Kuncewitch; Thomas; (Long Valley,
NJ) ; Kramer; Colleen; (Ho-Ho-Kus, NJ) ;
Robinson; Mary K.; (Sparta, NJ) ; Schmitz;
Kristen; (Jersey City, NJ) ; Allison; Scott;
(Stamford, CT) |
Correspondence
Address: |
HOFFMANN & BARON, LLP
6900 JERICHO TURNPIKE
SYOSSET
NY
11791
US
|
Assignee: |
CADBURY ADAMS USA LLC
Parsippany
NJ
|
Family ID: |
35355590 |
Appl. No.: |
11/913189 |
Filed: |
May 22, 2006 |
PCT Filed: |
May 22, 2006 |
PCT NO: |
PCT/US2006/019667 |
371 Date: |
June 4, 2008 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
11210954 |
Aug 24, 2005 |
|
|
|
11913189 |
|
|
|
|
10925822 |
Aug 25, 2004 |
|
|
|
11210954 |
|
|
|
|
60683634 |
May 23, 2005 |
|
|
|
60650758 |
Feb 7, 2005 |
|
|
|
60776699 |
Feb 24, 2006 |
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
705/14.26 ;
426/5 |
Current CPC
Class: |
A23V 2002/00 20130101;
A23V 2002/00 20130101; A23V 2250/24 20130101; A23V 2200/22
20130101; A23V 2200/22 20130101; A23V 2250/64 20130101; A23V
2250/51082 20130101; A23V 2250/24 20130101; A23V 2250/032 20130101;
A23V 2250/6416 20130101; A23V 2250/6416 20130101; A23V 2250/5432
20130101; A23V 2200/04 20130101; A23V 2250/642 20130101; A23V
2250/24 20130101; A23V 2250/5028 20130101; A23V 2200/15 20130101;
A23V 2250/642 20130101; A23V 2200/04 20130101; A23V 2002/00
20130101; A23G 4/20 20130101; G06Q 30/0225 20130101; A23V 2250/1634
20130101; A23V 2250/1842 20130101; A23V 2002/00 20130101; A23G
4/205 20130101; A23V 2002/00 20130101; A23L 29/37 20160801; A23G
4/10 20130101 |
Class at
Publication: |
705/14 ;
426/5 |
International
Class: |
A23G 4/20 20060101
A23G004/20; G06Q 30/00 20060101 G06Q030/00 |
Claims
1. A packaged gum product, comprising: a plurality of individual
pieces of gum, wherein each piece of gum includes: a center-fill
region; a gum region surrounding said center-fill region, said gum
region comprising a gum base; optionally a third region surrounding
at least a portion of said gum region, wherein one of said regions
comprises at least one first sensate and at least a second of said
regions comprises at least one second sensate which is distinct
from said at least one first sensate; and a package assembly that
contains said plurality of individual pieces of gum, said package
assembly having indicia placed on an outer surface, said indicia
being indicative of said first sensate and said second sensate.
2. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said center-fill
region comprises said first sensate and said gum region comprises
said second sensate.
3. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said center-fill
region comprises said first sensate and said third region comprises
said second sensate.
4. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said gum region
comprises said first sensate and said third region comprises said
second sensate.
5. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said center-fill
region comprises said first sensate, said gum region comprises said
second sensate and said third region comprises a third sensate.
6. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein at least one of
said sensates is encapsulated.
7-9. (canceled)
10. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said first sensate
comprises a cooling agent and said second sensate comprises a
warming agent.
11. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said first sensate
comprises a cooling agent and said second sensate comprises a
tingling agent.
12. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said first sensate
comprises a warming agent and said second sensate comprises a
tingling agent.
13. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said center-fill
region is selected from the group consisting of: liquid; gel;
powder; solid; gas; and combinations thereof.
14. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said third region
comprises a coating.
15-28. (canceled)
29. A method of marketing a gum product to a consumer, comprising:
providing a plurality of individual pieces of gum, wherein each
piece of gum includes: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding the center-fill region, the gum region comprising a gum
base; optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion of
the gum region, wherein one of the regions comprises at least one
first sensate and at least a second of the regions comprises at
least one second sensate which is distinct from the at least one
first sensate; and providing a package assembly that contains said
plurality of individual pieces of gum, said package assembly having
indicia placed on an outer surface thereof to inform a consumer of
said first sensate and said second sensate.
30. The method of claim 29, further comprising providing a web
page, said web page including at least a portion of said
indicia.
31. The method of claim 29, further comprising providing an
advertisement including at least a portion of said indicia.
32. The method of claim 29, further comprising providing a display
device configured to hold said package and including at least a
portion of said indicia.
33. The method of claim 29, further comprising providing an audio
message representative of said first sensate and said second
sensate.
34. The method of claim 29, further comprising providing a visual
image including at least a portion of said indicia.
35. The method of claim 29, further comprising preparing a
commercial indicative of said gum product.
36-40. (canceled)
41. A packaged gum product, comprising: a plurality of individual
pieces of gum, wherein each piece of gum includes: a center-fill
region; a gum region surrounding said center-fill region, said gum
region comprising a gum base; optionally a third region surrounding
at least a portion of said gum region, wherein one of said regions
comprises at least one first sensate and at least a second of said
regions comprises at least one second sensate which is distinct
from said at least one first sensate; and a package assembly
comprising a plurality of wrappers for each of the plurality of
individual pieces of gum, at least one of the plurality of wrappers
having indicia being indicative of said first sensate and said
second sensate.
42-43. (canceled)
44. The packaged gum product of claim 1, wherein said package
assembly comprises an overwrap portion that contains said plurality
of individual pieces of gum, said overwrap portion comprising said
indicia being indicative of said first sensate and said second
sensate.
Description
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional
Application No. 60/776,699, filed Feb. 24, 2006 and U.S.
Provisional Application No. 60/683,634, filed May 23, 2005, and is
a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No.
11/210,954, filed on Aug. 24, 2005, which is a continuation-in-part
of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/925,822, filed Aug. 25,
2004, the contents all of which are incorporated herein by
reference.
FIELD
[0002] The present invention relates to a package assembly for a
multi-layer center-filled chewing gum. The package assembly
supports individual gum pieces that have a center surrounded by a
gum region. Optionally, the individual gum pieces may be further
coated with an external coating layer. Components of the individual
gum pieces create a duality, such as a dual sensation perception,
that are identified by indicia on the package.
BACKGROUND
[0003] Liquid or center-filled gum and other confectionery products
are in popular demand today. Typically, these products have a solid
exterior portion and a soft or liquid-type center. The outer
portion can be chewing gum or bubble gum of some type, while the
liquid center portion can be a flavored material typically having a
syrup-like consistency.
[0004] There are also products having a chewing gum or bubble gum
core with a hard sugar or sugarless shell on the exterior. These
products include, for example well-known pellet gum products sold
under the brand names Chiclets.RTM., Clorets.RTM., and
Dentyne-Ice.RTM.. Both liquid filled and coated gum products are in
popular demand.
[0005] Also in popular demand are products that provide a dual
flavor perception upon consumption. In particular, products that
include a distinct flavor combination, such as strawberry and
banana, may satisfy a consumer preference for a dual perception
during consumption of the product. Traditional chewing gums,
however, merely provide a single gum flavor, such as peppermint gum
or wintergreen gum. Single-flavor gums cannot satisfy the consumer
preference for more complex, flavored confectionery products.
[0006] Furthermore, consumers are always searching for newer and
more interesting chewing gum products. Products that can provide
different types of dualities, including dual flavor combinations,
however, are not met by the currently available chewing gums.
Distinct tastes, sensations and functional benefits, for instance,
also may be desirable new dualities.
[0007] A variety of package assemblies already exist for
confectionary products that may have varying forms, such as gum
balls, gum slabs, lollipops, tablets, pellets, candy bottles,
etcetera. For example, gum slabs have been arranged in package
assemblies in both a side-by-side manner and a face-to-face manner.
Slabs and pellet gum products have also been arranged in foil
packages, such as blister trays, that are slidably insertable into
a housing for storage of the same.
[0008] Although such product packaging is popular and achieves
satisfactory results, product assemblies that may be used to market
different types of dualities, including dual flavor combinations,
are not met by the currently available packaging. For example,
chewing gums that can provide distinct tastes, sensations and
functional benefits are not adequately discernible from current
packaging assemblies
[0009] There is a need, therefore, for an improved package assembly
that can be used to market new chewing gum compositions,
particularly center-fill gum compositions, that provide different
types of dual perceptions upon consumption.
SUMMARY
[0010] Some embodiments provide a multi-modality chewing gum
composition including: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding the center-fill region, the gum region including a gum
base; and optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion
of the gum region, wherein one of the regions includes at least one
first sensate and at least a second of the regions includes at
least one second sensate which is distinct from the at least one
first sensate.
[0011] In some embodiments there is provided a multi-modality
chewing gum composition including: a center-fill region; a gum
region surrounding the center-fill region, the gum region including
a gum base; and optionally a third region surrounding at least a
portion of the gum region, wherein one of the regions includes a
first amount of at least one sensate and at least a second of the
regions includes a second amount of the at least one sensate, the
second amount of the at least one sensate being greater than the
first amount of the at least one sensate.
[0012] In some embodiments there is provided a multi-modality
chewing gum composition including: a center-fill region including
greater than zero up to about 10% by weight of the chewing gum
composition; a gum region including from about 55% to about 65% by
weight of the chewing gum composition; and a third region including
a coating, the coating including from about 25% to about 35% by
weight of the chewing gum composition, wherein one of the regions
includes at least one first sensate and at least a second of the
regions includes at least one second sensate which is distinct from
the at least one first sensate, and wherein the gum composition
further includes a gum piece of about three grams or less.
[0013] In some embodiments there is provided a multi-modality
chewing gum composition including: a center-fill region including
greater than zero up to about 10% by weight of the chewing gum
composition; a gum region including from about 55% to about 65% by
weight of the chewing gum composition; and a third region including
a coating, the coating including from about 25% to about 35% by
weight of the chewing gum composition, wherein one of the regions
includes a first amount of at least one sensate and at least a
second of the regions includes a second amount of the at least one
sensate, the second amount of the at least one sensate being
greater than the first amount of the at least one sensate, and
wherein the gum composition further includes a gum piece of about
three grams or less.
[0014] Some embodiments provide a multi-modality chewing gum
composition including: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding the center-fill region, the gum region including a gum
base; and optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion
of the gum region, wherein one of the regions includes at least one
first component and at least a second of the regions includes at
least one second component which is complementary to the at least
one first component.
[0015] Some embodiments provide a method of developing a chewing
gum product providing a consumer-preferred duality, which includes
the steps of: (a) identifying a consumer preference for a dual
sensate combination, wherein the dual sensate combination includes
at least one first sensate and at least one second sensate which is
distinct from the at least one first sensate; (b) preparing a
multi-modality chewing gum product including: (i) a center-fill
region; (ii) a gum region surrounding the center-fill region, the
gum region including a gum base; and (iii) optionally a third
region surrounding at least a portion of the gum region, wherein
one of the regions includes the at least one first sensate and at
least a second of the regions includes the at least one second
sensate; and (c) marketing the multi-modality chewing gum product
to consumers.
[0016] Some embodiments provide a method of preparing a
multi-modality chewing gum product, which includes the steps of:
(a) providing a chewing gum composition including: (i) a
center-fill region; (ii) a gum region surrounding the center-fill
region, the gum region including a gum base; and (iii) optionally a
third region surrounding at least a portion of the gum region,
wherein one of the regions includes at least one first sensate and
at least a second of the regions includes at least one second
sensate which is distinct from the at least one first sensate; and
(b) forming individual pieces of chewing gum from the chewing gum
composition.
[0017] In some embodiments there is provided a method of imparting
a dual sensate perception to an individual, which includes the
steps of: (a) providing a chewing gum product including: (i) a
center-fill region; (ii) a gum region surrounding the center-fill
region, the gum region including a gum base; and (iii) optionally a
third region surrounding at least a portion of the gum region,
wherein one of the regions includes at least one first sensate and
at least a second of the regions includes at least one second
sensate which is distinct from the at least one first sensate; and
(b) applying the chewing gum product into the oral cavity of the
individual, thereby releasing the at least one first sensate and
the at least one second sensate therefrom to impart a dual sensate
perception.
[0018] Some embodiments provide a multi-modality chewing gum
composition including: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding the center-fill region, the gum region including a gum
base; and optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion
of the gum region, wherein one of the regions includes at least one
first sensate and at least a second of the regions includes at
least one second sensate which is distinct from the at least one
first sensate, and wherein one of the regions includes at least one
first tastant and at least a second of the regions includes at
least one second tastant which is distinct from the at least one
first tastant.
[0019] Some embodiments provide a multi-modality chewing gum
composition including: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding the center-fill region, the gum region including a gum
base; and optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion
of the gum region, wherein one of the regions includes at least one
first sensate and at least a second of the regions includes at
least one second sensate which is distinct from the at least one
first sensate, and wherein one of the regions includes at least one
first functional agent and at least a second of the regions
includes at least one second functional agent which is distinct
from the at least one first functional agent.
[0020] Furthermore, in some embodiments, there is provided a
packaged gum product that includes a plurality of individual pieces
of gum, wherein each piece of gum includes: a center-fill region; a
gum region surrounding said center-fill region, said gum region
comprising a gum base; optionally a third region surrounding at
least a portion of said gum region, wherein one of said regions
comprises at least one first sensate and at least a second of said
regions comprises at least one second sensate which is distinct
from said at least one first sensate; and a package that contains
said plurality of individual pieces of gum, said package having
indicia placed on an outer surface, said indicia being indicative
of said first sensate and said second sensate.
[0021] In some embodiments there is provided a packaged gum product
that includes a plurality of individual pieces of gum, wherein each
piece of gum includes: a center-filled region; and a gum region
surrounding said center-fill region, said gum region comprising at
least one first sensate and said gum region comprising at least one
second sensate which is distinct from said at least one first
sensate; and a package that contains said plurality of individual
pieces of gum, said package having indicia placed on an outer
surface, said indicia being indicative of said first sensate and
said second sensate.
[0022] In some embodiments there is provided a packaged gum product
that includes a plurality of individual pieces of gum, wherein each
piece of gum includes: a center-filled region; and a gum region
surrounding said center-fill region, said gum region comprising at
least one first sensate and said gum region comprising at least one
second sensate which is distinct from said at least one first
sensate; and a package that contains said plurality of individual
pieces of gum, said package having indicia placed on an outer
surface thereof to inform consumers of said first sensate and said
second sensate.
[0023] In some embodiments there is provided a packaged gum product
that includes a plurality of individual pieces of gum, wherein each
piece of gum includes: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding said center-fill region, said gum region comprising a
gum base; optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion
of said gum region, wherein one of said regions comprises at least
one first sensate and at least a second of said regions comprises
at least one second sensate which is distinct from said at least
one first sensate; and a package assembly comprising an overwrap
portion that contains said plurality of individual pieces of gum,
said overwrap portion having indicia being indicative of said first
sensate and said second sensate.
[0024] In some embodiments there is provided a packaged gum product
that includes a plurality of individual pieces of gum, wherein each
piece of gum includes: a center-fill region; a gum region
surrounding said center-fill region, said gum region comprising a
gum base; optionally a third region surrounding at least a portion
of said gum region, wherein one of said regions comprises at least
one first sensate and at least a second of said regions comprises
at least one second sensate which is distinct from said at least
one first sensate; and a package assembly comprising a plurality of
wrappers for each of the plurality of individual pieces of gum, at
least one of the plurality of wrappers having indicia being
indicative of said first sensate and said second sensate.
[0025] Some embodiments provide a method of marketing a gum product
to a consumer, which includes the steps of: providing a plurality
of individual pieces of gum, wherein each piece of gum includes a
center-fill region; a gum region surrounding the center-fill
region, the gum region comprising a gum base; optionally a third
region surrounding at least a portion of the gum region, wherein
one of the regions comprises at least one first sensate and at
least a second of the regions comprises at least one second sensate
which is distinct from the at least one first sensate; and
providing a package that contains said plurality of individual
pieces of gum, said package having indicia placed on an outer
surface thereof to inform a consumer of said first sensate and said
second sensate.
[0026] Some embodiments provide a method of marketing a gum product
to a consumer, which includes the steps of: providing a plurality
of individual pieces of gum, wherein each piece of gum includes: a
center-fill region; a gum region surrounding the center-fill
region, the gum region comprising a gum base; optionally a third
region surrounding at least a portion of the gum region, wherein
one of the regions comprises at least one first sensate and at
least a second of the regions comprises at least one second sensate
which is distinct from the at least one first sensate; and
providing a package assembly comprising an overwrap portion that
contains said plurality of individual pieces of gum, said overwrap
portion having indicia being indicative of said first sensate and
said second sensate.
[0027] Some embodiments provide a method of marketing a gum product
to a consumer, which includes the steps of:providing a plurality of
individual pieces of gum, wherein each piece of gum includes: a
center-fill region; a gum region surrounding the center-fill
region, the gum region comprising a gum base; optionally a third
region surrounding at least a portion of the gum region, wherein
one of the regions comprises at least one first sensate and at
least a second of the regions comprises at least one second sensate
which is distinct from the at least one first sensate; and
providing a package assembly comprising a plurality of wrappers for
each of the plurality of individual pieces of gum, at least one of
the plurality of wrappers having indicia being indicative of said
first sensate and said second sensate.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0028] FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a first embodiment of the
packaging assembly of the present invention.
[0029] FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a second embodiment of the
packaging assembly of the present invention.
[0030] FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a third embodiment of a
package assembly of the present invention.
[0031] Like reference symbols in the various drawings indicate like
elements.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0032] Embodiments described herein provide a multi-component
composition that includes at least one center-fill region and a gum
region including a gum base. The individual gum piece also may
include an outer gum coating or shell, which can provide a
crunchiness to the piece when initially chewed. At least two
components that create a duality upon consumption may be included
in different regions of the gum piece. The individual gum pieces
may form a variety of shapes including pellet, tablet, ball,
pillow, chunk, stick and slab, among others.
[0033] As used herein the transitional term "comprising," (also
"comprises," etc.) which is synonymous with "including,"
"containing," or "characterized by," is inclusive or open-ended and
does not exclude additional, unrecited elements or method steps,
regardless of its use in the preamble or the body of a claim.
[0034] As used herein, the terms "bubble gum" and "chewing gum" are
used interchangeably and are both meant to include any gum
compositions.
[0035] As used herein the term "indicia," is descriptive matter
synonymous with "information related to," "information
representative of," and "information indicative of" and is
open-ended and can include any words, phrases, slogans, pictures,
symbols, contests, marketing campaigns, textures, colors,
intensities, or other characteristics or features relating to the
gum product.
[0036] As used herein, the terms "first region" and "center-fill"
are used interchangeably to refer to the innermost region of the
compositions. The term "center-fill" does not imply symmetry of a
gum piece, only that the "center-fill" is within another region of
the gum piece. In some embodiments, more than one center-fill may
be present.
[0037] As used herein, the terms "second region" and "gum region"
are used interchangeably to refer to a region of the compositions
that may be adjacent to or at least partially surrounding the
center-fill, or innermost, region. In some embodiments, the gum
region is an intermediate region.
[0038] As used herein, the terms "third region" and "coating" are
used interchangeably to refer to the outermost region of the
compositions.
[0039] As used herein, the terms "surround," "surrounding," and the
like are not limited to encircling. These terms may refer to
enclosing or confining on all sides, encircling or enveloping, and
are not limited to symmetrical or identical thicknesses for a
region in the gum product.
[0040] In some embodiments, the components of the center-fill
composition may be in different configurations depending on the
desired shape of the total gum composition. The center-fill area or
areas may be in either a concentric configuration with respect to
the gum region or in a layered configuration. A concentric
configuration may be acceptable for a ball, pillow or pellet shape,
while a layered configuration may be more suitable for a slab or a
stick shape. For example, if the total gum composition is in a ball
shape, a hollow, circular shell may be formed in the innermost
region of the gum piece. The shell may be filled with a center-fill
composition, and the other regions or layers of the gum piece may
encircle the center-filled area. However, if the total gum
composition is in a slab shape, a hollow shell formed in the
innermost region may be of a rectangular shape. The
rectangular-shaped shell may be filled with a center-fill
composition, and the other regions or layers of the gum piece may
enclose or confine the rectangular center-filled area on all sides
of the rectangle. Other examples include a pillow shaped gum piece
where the hollow shell follows the contours of the gum piece and
also is pillow shaped. The shape of the gum piece does not
necessarily dictate the shape of the hollow shell, which houses the
center-fill, but in many cases they are similarly shaped.
[0041] As used herein, the term "liquid" includes compositions that
can transfer moisture from the center-fill region to the gum
region. The term includes, but is not limited to, compositions
which will readily flow or maintain fluid properties at room
temperature and pressure. The term "liquid" may include solutions,
suspensions, emulsions, semi-solids, cremes, gels, etc. that may
not be completely liquid, but that can still lose liquidity because
of a transfer of moisture from the center-fill region to the gum
region. The "liquid" may be aqueous or non-aqueous. Also, the
"liquid" may include non-liquid components, such as solid particles
or gasses.
[0042] As used herein, the term "ingredient" and the term
"component" are used interchangeably to describe any additive,
fixing, substance, material, agent, active, element, or part that
may be included in the gum compositions of some embodiments.
[0043] As used herein, the term "duality" refers to the presence of
two characteristics that are complementary to each other, opposed
to each other, i.e., distinct, or different in intensity from each
other. The dual characteristics may be flavors, sensations, tastes,
functionalities, or other characteristics or benefits. Flavors,
sensates, tastants and functional agents also may include compounds
that potentiate each of these types of components. The dual
characteristics also may be colors or textures. In some
embodiments, the duality may be a dual perception, which refers to
the perception by an individual of two characteristics that are
complementary to each other, opposed to each other, i.e., distinct,
or different in intensity from each other.
[0044] The term "multi-modality" refers to the presence of at least
two characteristics that are complementary, opposed, i.e.,
distinct, or different in intensity from one another. The
multi-modal characteristics may be flavors, sensations, tastes,
functionalities or combinations thereof. Flavors, sensates,
tastants and functional agents also may include compounds that
potentiate each of these types of components. The multi-modal
characteristics also could be colors or textures. The term
"multi-modality" is broader than and encompasses the term "duality"
in that it includes embodiments that have a single duality, as well
as embodiments that have more than one duality. For example,
multi-modality may encompass two different dualities in one
center-fill gum composition, such as dual flavors and dual
tastes.
[0045] The term "complementary" refers to components that are in
the same or similar flavor family, for example, the mint family or
the fruit family; or components that are in the same or similar
sensation family, for example, the cooling family, the warming
family or the tingling family; or components that are in the same
or similar taste family, for example, the sweetener family, the
sour family, the bitter/astringent family, the salty family, the
umami family or the kokumi family; or components that are in the
same or similar functional family, for example, the breath
freshening family or other functional families provided in Table 2
herein. The terms "family" and "type" are used interchangeably
herein when referring to multi-modality components.
[0046] The term "opposed" means distinctly different components,
for example, components that are from different families, such as a
component in the flavor family and a component in the taste
family.
[0047] The term "different in intensity" means that the at least
two components that form the duality or multi-modality may be the
same component but create the duality or multi-modality by being
present in different amounts or by being encapsulated thereby
providing a different intensity from one another. This different
intensity is formed by the component being in different amounts
from one region of the gum to another, or from being released at
one rate in one region versus being released at another rate in
another region.
Dualities and Multi-Modalities
[0048] As mentioned above, at least two components may be included
in the center-fill gum to create a duality or multi-modality. In
some embodiments, the at least two components may be opposed to
each other, i.e., distinctly different components. For example, two
opposed flavors, such as strawberry and kiwi, may be employed. In
some embodiments, the at least two components may be complementary
to one another. For example, two mint oils that complement each
other, such as peppermint and spearmint, may be employed. In some
embodiments, the at least two components may differ in intensity
from one another. For example, a single mint oil may be used, but
in different amounts such that an intensity difference exists
between the two portions of the mint oil.
[0049] The components that create the duality, or multi-modality,
may be included in different regions of the center-fill gum. For
instance, in some embodiments, a first component may be present in
the center-fill and a second component, which is distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first
component, may be present in the gum region. Some embodiments may
include a first component in the center-fill and a second
component, which is distinct from, complementary to or different in
intensity from the first component, in the coating. Some other
embodiments may include a first component in the gum region and a
second component, which is distinct from, complementary to or
different in intensity from the first component, in the
coating.
[0050] A variety of other combinations of the first and second
components also may be employed. In some embodiments, for instance,
a first component may be included in one region of the center-fill
gum and a second component, which may be divided into two portions,
may be included in the other two regions of the center-fill gum.
The second component may be distinct from, complementary to or
different in intensity from the first component. For example, the
first component may be included in the gum region. A first portion
of the second component may be included in the center-fill and a
second portion of the second component may be included in the
coating of the center-fill gum. The first and second portions of
the second component may be the same or different in amount.
[0051] Non-limiting examples of some of the possible physical
combinations for providing a duality in a center-fill gum are
indicated in Table 1 below. In particular, Table 1 identifies a
number of different physical combinations of components that may be
employed involving dualities among: (1) distinct components; (2)
complementary components; and (3) intensity differences between a
single component. In addition, the chart also depicts possible
multiple duality combinations in category (4).
[0052] As referred to in Table 1 and as defined above, the coating
composition refers to the outermost region of the gum, the gum
region composition refers to the intermediate region and the
center-fill composition refers to the innermost region. As used in
Table 1, A represents a first component and B represents a second
component, which is distinct from the first component. A'
represents a second component that is complementary to the first
component. 1/n is used to indicate a fractional portion of
component A. 1/m is used to indicate a fractional portion of
component A that is different from fractional portion 1/n. n*A is
used to indicate a multiplicative portion of component A, and m*A
indicates a multiplicative portion of component A that is different
from multiplicative portion n*A. In some embodiments and examples,
n may be equal to m. In other embodiments and examples, n may be
different from m. In some embodiments and examples, n and/or m may
be 0, 1 or other values.
TABLE-US-00001 TABLE 1 Coating Gum Region Center-Fill Composition
Composition Composition (1) Dualities based on differences between
separate and distinct components: A B A B A B B A B A B A A A B A B
A B A A 1/n A B 1/n A 1/n A 1/n A B B 1/n A 1/n A 1/n A B 1/m A 1/n
A 1/m A B B 1/n A 1/m A (2) Dualities based on complementary
components: A A' A A' A A' A' A A' A A' A A' A A A A' A A A A' 1/n
A A' 1/n A 1/n A 1/n A A' A' 1/n A 1/n A 1/n A A' 1/m A 1/n A 1/m A
A' A' 1/n A 1/m A (3) Dualities based on intensity differences of a
single component: n * A A n * A A n * A A A n * A A n * A A n * A A
A n * A A n * A A n * A A A n * A A n * A n * A n * A A A n * A n *
A n * A A m * A n * A m * A A A n * A m * A (4) Multiple dualities:
A A' B A B A' B A A' A nA B A B nA B A nA A AB AB A A AB A AB AB A
AB A A A'B A'B A A A'B A A'B A'B A A'B A AB A'B' A'B' AB AB A'B' AB
A'B' AB A'B' A'B' AB A A'B' B A'B' A B A B A'B' A AB B AB A B A B
AB A A'B B A'B' A B A B A'B' AB A AB A AB AB AB AB A AB nA AB nA AB
AB AB AB nA AB nA mAB nA mAB AB mAB AB nA A nAB nAB A A nAB A nAB
nAB A nAB A nA AB AB nA nA AB nA AB AB nA AB nA
[0053] Table 1, above, provides a variety of different physical
combinations of two components used to impart a duality to a
center-fill gum. Other possibilities and combinations also exist
and different examples may be combined.
[0054] Some embodiments provided herein may extend to combinations
that include more than two components to create a duality, or
multi-modality. In some embodiments, for instance, three components
may be employed, one component in each separate region of the
center-fill gum. For example, a first flavor may be present in the
center-fill, a second flavor in the gum region and a third flavor
in the coating. The three flavors may be distinct from one another,
complementary to one another or different in intensities from one
another. For instance, mint oil may be present in the center-fill
and the coating and cinnamon oil may be present in the gum region.
A duality based on distinct flavors thereby is provided. By way of
another example, a first functional agent may be present in the
center-fill, a second functional agent in the gum region and a
third functional agent in the coating. The three functional agents
may be distinct from one another, complementary to one another or
different in intensities from one another. For instance, menthol
may be present in the center-fill and the coating and chlorophyll
may be contained in the gum region. Menthol and chlorophyll are
different breath fresheners. Accordingly, a duality based on
complementary functional agents is provided.
[0055] In some embodiments, three components may be used to impart
a duality, or multi-modality, with a first component in one region
of the center-fill gum and the second and third components together
in another region of the center-fill gum. For example, strawberry
flavor could be included in the gum region. A combination of lemon
flavor and kiwi flavor could be included in the center-fill. A
duality based on three distinct flavors therefore is provided by
the gum.
[0056] In embodiments containing three or more components, the
components may provide multiple dualities. For instance, in a three
component embodiment, two of the components may be distinct from
each other, whereas two of the components are complementary or
different in intensity from each other. A center-fill gum may, for
example, include peppermint flavor in the center-fill region and a
different level of peppermint flavor in the coating, thereby
imparting a first duality, which is an intensity differential.
Cinnamon may be included in the gum region, which is distinct from
the peppermint flavors. A second duality based on the
cinnamon-peppermint flavor distinction also is present in the
center-fill gum. Accordingly, a multi-modality gum may be provided
having two different dualities.
[0057] A number of different combinations including two, three,
four or even more components in any region of the center-fill gum
may be prepared providing additional dualities or combinations of
dualities.
[0058] Alternatively, in some embodiments, the at least two
components that create the duality, or multi-modality, may be
present in the same region of the center-fill gum. For instance,
two distinct flavors, such as strawberry and kiwi, both may be
present in the center-fill region of the gum composition. Some
embodiments may include multiple dualities, such as dual flavors
and dual sensations, all in the same region of the center-fill gum.
In some other embodiments, a single duality may be present in one
region, and a second duality may be present in another region of
the center-fill gum. In still further embodiments, a first duality
may be present via two different layers (e.g., a first component in
the coating and a second component in the center-fill) and a second
duality may be present via a different set of layers (e.g., a third
component in the gum layer and a fourth component in the
coating).
[0059] As noted above, there are several different types of
dualities that may be present in a center-fill gum. The components
that create the dualities may be used in any of the physical
combinations discussed above. In particular, dualities may exist
among flavors, sensations, tastes and functionalities.
Additionally, dualities among colors may exist. Combinations of
these different dualities also may be employed.
Flavor Dualities
[0060] More specifically, some center-fill gums may include a
flavor duality. In some embodiments, one of the regions of the
center-fill gum may include a first flavor and at least a second of
the regions may include at least a second flavor. The second flavor
may be distinct from, complementary to or different in intensity
from the first flavor. For instance, the center-fill region may
include the first flavor and the gum region may include the second
flavor. The center-fill region may include the first flavor and the
coating may include the second flavor. The gum region may include
the first flavor and the coating may include the second flavor.
[0061] In some embodiments, the center-fill region may include the
first flavor, the gum region the second flavor and the coating may
include a third flavor. The coating flavor may be the same as the
gum region flavor. In such embodiments, the center-fill flavor may
be distinct from, complementary to or different in intensity from
both the coating and gum region flavors. In other embodiments, the
coating flavor may be complementary to the gum region flavor, but
distinct from the center-fill flavor. For example, the gum region
and coating flavors may be two different mint flavors, such as,
peppermint and spearmint. The center-fill flavor may be distinct
from the mint flavors, such as, for example, cinnamon.
Alternatively, the coating flavor may be the same as the
center-fill flavor. In such embodiments, the gum region flavor may
be distinct from, complementary to or different in intensity from
both the coating and center-fill flavors. In other embodiments, the
coating flavor may be complementary to the center-fill flavor, but
distinct from the gum region flavor.
[0062] A variety of flavors may be used in any of these or other
combinations to impart different dualities. More specifically, in
some embodiments, at least two flavors that are distinct may be
employed. Dualities based on distinct flavors may include, but are
not limited to, the following combinations: a mint flavor and a
fruit flavor; a mint flavor and a spicy flavor; a mint flavor and a
savory flavor; a mint flavor and an indulgent flavor; a fruit
flavor and a spicy flavor; a fruit flavor and a savory flavor; a
fruit flavor and an indulgent flavor; a spicy flavor and a savory
flavor; a spicy flavor and an indulgent flavor; and a savory flavor
and an indulgent flavor.
[0063] Some of the duality combinations set forth above include an
indulgent flavor. As used herein, "indulgent" refers to a type of
flavor associated with a creamy or decadent taste. Sometimes these
flavors are referred to as "sweet/brown" in the art. Examples of
suitable indulgent flavors include, but are not limited to, maple,
cola, chocolate, dulce de leche, raisin, vanilla, caramel, dairy
flavors, such as cream, butter, milk and yogurt, butterscotch,
peanut butter, fruit cream flavors, such as strawberry cream, and
combinations thereof.
[0064] In some embodiments, at least two flavors that are
complementary may be employed. In some embodiments, the
complementary flavors may be the same type of flavor, e.g., two
different mint flavors. In some other embodiments, a first flavor,
e.g., a fruit flavor, may be provided, and the second flavor may be
complementary by enhancing the first flavor, e.g., a fruit
potentiator. More specifically, dualities based on complementary
flavors may include, but are not limited to, the following
combinations: a mint flavor and a mint potentiator; a fruit flavor
and a fruit potentiator; a spicy flavor and a spice potentiator; a
savory flavor and a savory potentiator; a mint flavor and a
different mint flavor; a fruit flavor and a different fruit flavor;
a spicy flavor and a different spicy flavor; a savory flavor and a
different savory flavor; and an indulgent flavor and a different
indulgent flavor.
[0065] In some embodiments, the duality may be based on at least
two portions of a flavor that differ in intensity. For instance,
any of the following types of flavors may be used in at least two
portions, each of which contains a different amount of the flavor:
mint flavor; fruit flavor; spicy flavor; savory flavor; and
indulgent flavor. For example, one of the regions of the chewing
gum may include a first amount of a flavor and a separate region
may include a second amount of the same flavor. The second amount
may be greater than the first amount of the flavor, thereby
creating an intensity differential in the flavor impact. It further
may be desirable, in some embodiments, to include a third portion
of the same flavor in the remaining region of the chewing gum,
which is different in amount than the first and/or second
portion.
[0066] A variety of exemplary flavors, such as mint, fruit, spicy,
savory and indulgent flavors are provided in Table 2 herein.
Specific flavors may be selected from Table 2 and combined in
various manners as set forth above and in other combinations or
embodiments.
[0067] Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the flavors
may have a modified release profile. As described in more detail
below, components may be at least partially encapsulated to provide
a modified release profile. Suitable encapsulating materials and
methods of encapsulation are provided in more detail below in the
section entitled "Additional Components." One or all of the flavors
used in the chewing gums may be at least partially encapsulated.
Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the flavors may
include a mixture of the flavor in its encapsulated and
unencapsulated (sometimes referred to as "free") forms.
Encapsulated and unencapsulated forms of a flavor may be included
in any of the regions of the chewing gum in the same or different
amounts.
[0068] Some embodiments described herein extend to methods of
preparing multi-modality chewing gum products, which include at
least one flavor duality. In particular, a chewing gum composition
including any of the flavor dualities described above may first be
provided. The chewing gum composition may include a center-fill
region, a gum region surrounding or adjacent to the center-fill
region and optionally a third region, which may be a coating or
shell. One of the center-fill gum regions may include at least one
first flavor and at least a second of the center-fill gum regions
may include at least one second flavor. The second flavor may be
distinct from, complementary to or different in intensity from the
first flavor. Individual chewing gum pieces then may be formed from
the chewing gum composition. Methods of forming individual gum
pieces from chewing gum compositions are described in more detail
below in the section entitled "Center-Fill Chewing Gum
Compositions." As described below, U.S. Pat. No. 6,280,780 to
Degady et al. ("Degady"), which is herein incorporated by reference
in its entirety, describes a suitable apparatus and method for
forming center-filled gum pellets.
[0069] In some embodiments, methods of imparting a dual flavor
perception are provided. In accordance therewith, a chewing gum
product prepared as described above may be provided. The chewing
gum product may include a center-fill region, a gum region
surrounding or adjacent to the center-fill region and optionally a
third region, which may be a coating. One of the center-fill gum
regions may include at least one first flavor and at least a second
of the center-fill gum regions may include at least one second
flavor. The second flavor may be distinct from, complementary to or
different in intensity from the first flavor. The chewing gum
product may be applied into the oral cavity of an individual. As
the individual chews the product and saliva mixes therewith, the at
least one first flavor and the at least one second flavor may be
released from the gum. The individual may experience a dual flavor
perception as the first and second flavors are released and combine
in the oral cavity. The different flavors may interact with
different portions of the oral cavity, different receptors in the
individual's mouth, and the like.
[0070] Additional embodiments described herein relate to methods of
developing chewing gum products, which provide a consumer-preferred
duality, particularly a flavor duality. In accordance therewith, a
consumer preference for a dual flavor combination may first be
identified. The dual flavor combination may include at least one
first flavor and at least one second flavor, which is distinct
from, complementary to or different intensity from the first
flavor. A variety of methods may be used to identify a consumer
preference for a specific flavor duality, such as, market research,
including consumer surveys, taste panels, and the like. Once a
consumer preference for a dual flavor combination, such as, for
example, kiwi and banana, is identified, a chewing gum product
tailored to satisfy that preference may be provided. In particular,
any of the center-fill chewing gum products described above may be
prepared. The first flavor of the consumer-preferred duality may be
added to one region of the gum and the second flavor of the
consumer-preferred duality may be added to another region of the
gum. The chewing gum product may be marketed to consumers based on
the consumer-preferred duality.
[0071] The consumer-preferred duality provided by the gum product
may be marketed to consumers in a variety of manners. Suitable
marketing strategies, include, for example, print, radio, satellite
radio, television, movie theater and online advertising campaigns,
point-of-purchase advertisements, billboard advertisements, public
transportation and telephone booth advertisements, indicia on the
product packaging (e.g., slogans, trademarks, terms and colors),
instant messaging, ringtones, and the like.
[0072] The package assembly of the present invention may be used to
market and reinforce the multi-modality gum product to consumers.
In one preferred embodiment, the package assembly of the present
invention includes indicia e.g., descriptive matter such as words,
phrases, slogans, pictures, symbols, contests, marketing campaigns,
textures, colors, intensities, or other characteristics or
features, that are be used to relate information to consumers
concerning the gum product.
[0073] Several advantages may be derived by providing indicia on
the package assembly. For example, a package assembly having
indicia may provide notice to consumers that a specific product of
known quality, aroma and taste, is available. The indicia also may
provide consumers with a latent image of the product and reinforce
consumer image of the product.
[0074] In one preferred embodiment, the indicia extends over a
portion of an outer surface of the package assembly. By providing
the indicia on the package, the package assembly of the present
invention may be utilized as a marketing tool. For example, a
consumer viewing the product package may be immediately informed of
the multi-modality of the product, such as a first sensate and
second sensate, contained in the product.
[0075] The present invention, however, is not limited to the
indicia being included on the outer surface of the assembly. For
example, indicia also may be included on an overwrap for a package
(as opposed to or in addition to the package assembly itself) as
discussed in connection with FIG. 2, as well as printed on the
product itself, discussed in connection with FIG. 3. In one
preferred embodiment, as shown and discussed in connection with
FIG. 2, indicia also may be provided on the surfaces of one or more
wrappers used to protect and store the gum product in the assembly.
Although the wrapper is provided with indicia of which at least
some may be substantially the same as that on the outer surface of
the assembly, the wrapper indicia also may include further
information relating to, say, a contest or promotion of the product
contained in the assembly. The contest or promotion may include a
sweepstake, prize, token or redeemable voucher.
[0076] The communication of the indicia to consumers can be done
through a number of media outlets and includes such things as
printed indicia on product packages, printed messages in magazines,
newspapers, newsletters and the like, audio and visual outlets such
as radio and television as well as other outlets, such as the
Internet, that are suitable for use in delivering the message to a
targeted demographic.
[0077] Various marketing techniques also may be developed using the
indicia of the present invention. For example, an advertisement for
the product may be provided that utilizes at least a portion of the
indicia included on the package. In one preferred embodiment, for
example, the advertisement takes the form of an audio message that
is played upon the user removing the product from the
packaging.
[0078] In another embodiment, a display device, is configured to
support the package assembly and thereby, show at least a portion
of the indicia indicating the multi-modality of the product
contained therein. For example, in one preferred embodiment, a
display stand is provided for displaying and supporting the package
assembly. The display stand may be used in a retail establishment
at the point of purchase such as the cash register. The display
stand may be formed from transparent plastic to allow clear viewing
of the indicia included on the package assembly.
[0079] Other marketing techniques also may be developed to generate
sales of the product. For example, in some preferred embodiments,
audio messages are created that recite indicia (e.g., slogans,
jingles) included on the product package. This may include a method
of publishing audio files to the Internet, and allowing consumers
to subscribe to a feed to receive the audio files containing the
indicia. Visual images of the product also may be prepared that
include at least a portion of the indicia included on the product
package. For example live or delayed sound or video broadcasts of
the indicia may be provided to consumers using web technologies
over the Internet. Radio and television commercials also may be
used to market the product to consumers using at least a portion of
the indicia, and thereby increase revenue.
[0080] Of course, it is to be understood that the invention is not
limited to the above referenced techniques and that various changes
and modifications to the techniques may be affected herein by one
skilled in the art without departing from the scope or spirit of
the invention. It is also to be understood and that it is intended
to claim all such changes and modifications that fall within the
scope of the invention.
[0081] Various packaging assemblies known in the art may be adapted
to incorporate features of the present invention. For example, as
disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 2,279,471 to Wilson, which is
incorporated herein in its entirety, a box is disclosed that may
support chocolate and other confectionary products that may be
adapted to support the gum compositions and provide the indicia of
the present invention. U.S. Design Pat. Nos. D398,520 and D392,885,
which are incorporated herein in their entirety, also disclose a
box-type packaging that can be adapted to support and provide the
gum compositions and the indicia of the present invention,
respectively.
[0082] Gum stick packaging known in the art also may be adapted to
incorporate the above described indicia and support the
multi-modality chewing gum product of the present invention. For
example, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,926,951 to Huffer et. al., which is
incorporated herein in its entirety, a laminate for gum packaging
is disclosed that may include the indicia of the present invention.
In addition, U.S. Pat. No. 5,029,712 to O'Brien et. al., which is
incorporated herein in its entirety, discloses a reclosable package
for holding items having an adhesive front label applied to the
front portion of the container. The reclosable package may be used
to support the gum compositions of the present invention. Indicia
of the present invention also may be provided by the reclosable
package. Chewing gum packages, such as those disclosed in U.S. Pat.
No. 2,192,472 and U.S. Pat. No. 2,192,473, which are incorporated
herein in their entirety, also may be adapted to provide the
indicia and support the gum product of the present invention.
[0083] The present invention may be applied to packaging tins used
for supporting confectionary products. For example, in U.S. Design
Pat. No. D480,561 to Simon et. al., which is incorporated herein in
its entirety, a case for a chewing gum packet is disclosed that can
be adapted to support the gum compositions and provide the indicia
of the present invention. U.S. Design Pat. No. D471,804 to Staples,
which is incorporated herein in its entirety, discloses a chewing
gum tin that also may be used to support the gum compositions and
provide the indicia of the present invention. In addition, U.S.
Design Pat. No. D457,427 to Diaz, which is incorporated herein in
its entirety, discloses a combined chewing gum box and clip that
may be used to support the gum compositions and provide the indicia
of the present invention. Other tin packaging assemblies that may
be adapted to support the multi-modality chewing gum product and
include indicia of the present invention include U.S. Design Pat.
D412,279, U.S. Design Pat. No. D406,496, U.S. Design Pat. No.
D351,789 and U.S. Design Pat. No. D449,782, all of which are
incorporated herein in their entirety.
[0084] Dispensors also may be used to support the multi-modality
chewing gum product and provide the indicia of the present
invention. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,540,353 to Coleman et. al.,
which is incorporated herein in its entirety, discloses a candy
container and dispenser that includes a housing having a top
enclosure with an aperture, wherein pieces of candy having a size
smaller than the aperture may be dispensed by shaking. The candy
container and dispenser may be adapted to house the gum product and
provide the indicia of the present invention. U.S. Pat. No.
5,370,219 to Violett, which is incorporated herein in its entirety,
discloses containers for the storage and transportation of sticks
of gum, that may be adapted to support the chewing gum and provide
the indicia of the present invention. U.S. Pat. No. 5,056,683 to
O'Brien et. al., which is incorporated herein in its entirety,
discloses a cardboard stick gum dispenser that may be adapted to
support the multi-modality chewing gum and indicia of the present
invention. Similarly, other dispensor packages may be used with the
present invention. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,465,208 to Buban et
al., which is incorporated herein in its entirety, discloses a
chewing gum dispenser having an upper cover whose central region is
cut away to afford access to a stick product. The chewing gum
dispenser of Buban et. al. may be adapted to provide the indicia
and support the chewing gum product of the present invention.
Similarly, the dispensers disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4.170,914 and
3,591,043, the contents of which are incorporated herein in their
entirety, also may be adapted to support the multi-modality chewing
gum and to provide the indicia of the present invention.
[0085] Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above
identified package assemblies and various other types of package
assemblies may also be used to support the multi-modality chewing
gum of the present invention. For example, tablet packs, as
disclosed in U.S. Design Pat. No. D344,018 to Kelsey et. al., which
is incorporated herein in its entirety, may be adapted to provide
the indicia and support the product of the present invention. The
stacked articles disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,591,043 to Murphy
also may be adapted to support the gum product and provide the
indicia of the present invention.
[0086] Sealed packets also may be used to support the
multi-modality gum product and provide the indicia of the present
invention. For example, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,874,096 to
Tessera-Chiesa, which is incorporated herein in its entirety, a
sealed packet containing food products in pieces, particularly
sweets and the like, is disclosed that can be adapted to provide
the gum product and indicia of the present invention. Furthermore,
combination packages, such as the apparatus for carrying gum and
mints disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,655,488, which is incorporated
herein in its entirety, may be used to support the gum product and
provide the indicia of the present invention and overwrapping
packages, such as those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 2,571,516 and
U.S. Design Pat. No. D383,973, which are incorporated herein in
their entirety, may be adapted to support the multi-modality gum
product and provide the indicia of the present invention.
[0087] Reference will now be made to the accompanying drawings,
which further assist in illustrating the various pertinent features
of the packaging assembly of the present invention. Although the
invention will now be described primarily in conjunction with gum
packaging, it should be expressly understood that the invention may
be applicable to other applications where multiple separable
compartments, each for one or more removable objects, is
required/desired. In this regard, the following description of a
gum packaging assembly is presented for purposes of illustration
and description. Furthermore, the descriptions are not intended to
limit the invention to the forms disclosed herein. Consequently,
variations and modifications commensurate with the following
teachings, and skill and knowledge of the relevant art, are within
the scope of the packaging assemblies.
[0088] Referring now to FIG. 1, a first embodiment of a package
assembly 100 according to the present invention is disclosed. The
package assembly 100 includes an upper compartment 14 and a lower
compartment 16 that are used to support multi-modality chewing gum
compositions. The upper and lower compartments 14, 16 may be easily
separated from one another along a perforation 12. As shown in FIG.
1, the compartments 14 and 16 are typically provided in an attached
manner and are folded together to place one facing the other. A
cover flap 18 is provided from the upper compartment 14 having an
end 20 laid over a receiving slot 22 in a back panel 24 of the
lower compartment 16 to close the assembly 100. The consumer can
tuck the end 20 into the slot 22 to form a compact package 26.
Details of forming the package assembly 100 of FIG. 1 are described
in U.S. patent application Ser. No 10/883,468, filed on Jul. 1,
2004, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
[0089] As shown in FIG. 1, each of the compartments includes
indicia 30, 32 that are indicative of the duality provided by the
product contained therein. The location of the indicia 30, 32 may
vary based on design considerations as well as functional
considerations decided upon to effectively market the product. For
example, in one preferred embodiment, one of the indicia 30 is
included on one of upper compartment 14 and the other indicia 32 is
included on the lower compartment 16. The indicia 30, 32 may be
indicative of the flavors, sensations, tastes, functionalities, or
other characteristics or benefits provided by the gum compositions
contained in the compartments that are complementary to each other,
opposed to each other, i.e., distinct, or different in intensity
from each other. For example, in one preferred embodiment, one
indicia 30 may indicate a sweet flavor gum composition accessible
from the upper compartment 14 and another indicia 32 indicate a
sour flavor gum composition accessible from the lower compartment
16. Of course, as mentioned previously, the indicia may be any
words, phrases, slogans, pictures, symbols, contests, marketing
campaigns, textures, colors, intensities, or other characteristics
or features relating to the gum product.
[0090] Referring now to FIG. 2, a second embodiment of a package
assembly 200 according to the present invention is disclosed. As
shown in FIG. 2, when the consumer opens the assembly 200 by
pulling up the tab 250a of a flap 250, a foil portion of a packet
206, e.g., an overwrap, supporting the multi-modality chewing gum
compositions of the present invention tears along a scoring 243
leaving an array 212 of filled-wrappers of gum 214. The wrappers
214 protect and store the gum product in the assembly 200. As shown
in FIG. 2, in one preferred embodiment, for example, one or more of
the gum wrappers 214 include indicia 215 that may be used to
provide further information relating to the product, or a contest
or promotion relating to the product. Once the foil portion of the
packet 206 tears, the consumer may pull out as many gum slabs 214
as needed. In some preferred embodiments, as shown in FIG. 2, the
foil portion of the packet 206 also may contain indicia 217
relating to the product, such as a freshness data, as well as
contest or promotional information relating to the gum product.
Finally, the consumer may simply pull the flap 250 downward and
tuck the tab 250a into a slot 252 to close the package assembly
200. Details of forming the package assembly 200 of FIG. 2 are
described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/001,352, filed on
Oct. 31, 2001, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
[0091] As shown in FIG. 2, a front wall 218 of the packet also may
include indicia 230, 232 that are indicative of the duality
provided by the gum composition included therein. Similar to the
indicia 30, 32 described previously in connection with FIG. 1, the
indicia 230, 232 may be indicative of the flavors, sensations,
tastes, functionalities, or other characteristics or benefits
provided by the gum compositions. The location and number of
indicia 230, 232 included in the package assembly 200 also may vary
depending upon the marketing strategy chosen. For example, in some
preferred embodiments, indicia are also included on the flap 250 of
the assembly and are visible when the assembly 200 is opened.
[0092] A third embodiment of a product package assembly 300 of the
present invention is shown in FIG. 3. The package assembly includes
a sleeve 317 having a uniform shape. The assembly 300 also includes
one or more package or blister trays 314, 315 that are removable
from and reinsertable into the sleeve 317. For example, as shown by
the arrow 321 in FIG. 3, a consumer may slidably remove blister
trays 314, 315 from the sleeve 317 and slidably reinsert the
blister trays 314,315 into the sleeve 317 as desired. In a
preferred embodiment, for example, each blister tray 314,315
includes indicia 371a, 371b that provides information to consumers
relating to the packaging date of the assembly. Of course, as
mentioned previously, other indicia relating to the product may be
provided thereto.
[0093] Preferably, the blister trays 314, 315 of the present
invention are made primarily from plastic and/or plastic or metal
foils. As shown in FIG. 3, each tray 314, 315 may be attached to
each other via a perforated line 319 that allows the trays 314,315
to be separated from each other. For example, the blister trays
314, 315 may be easily separated from each other by tearing along
the perforated line 319.
[0094] As shown in FIG. 3, each of the trays 314, 315 includes a
plurality of compartments 318a-f, 318e-l, respectively, that extend
outwardly from each tray 314, 315. The compartments 318a-l support
the multi-modality chewing gum compositions of the present
invention. For example, one blister tray 314 may include a sweet
flavor gum composition 324a-f, and one blister tray 315 may include
a sour flavor gum composition 324g-l.
[0095] The front wall 328 of the sleeve 317 includes indicia 360,
362 that are indicative of the multi-modality of the gum product
supported therein. The indicia 360, 362 may indicate the flavors,
sensations, tastes, functionalities, or other characteristics or
benefits provided by the gum compositions included in the blister
trays 314, 315. As shown in FIG. 3, in one preferred embodiment,
the top wall 328 of the sleeve 317 includes openings 337a, 337b
that allow for displaying the multi-modality chewing gum
compositions when one or more trays 314, 315 are inserted into the
sleeve 317. For example, in one preferred embodiment, a sweet
flavor gum composition 324e is displayed through opening 337a and a
sour flavor gum composition 324L is displayed through opening 337b.
Indicia 360, 362 indicating "Sweet" and "Sour" flavors,
respectively, are located adjacent to the openings 337a, 337b and
thereby, are indicative of the flavors. Of course, the indicia 360,
362 also inform the consumer of the multi-modality of the gum
compositions.
[0096] As shown in FIG. 3, one or more of the gum product may have
included therein indicia 370 that may be pre-printed, stamped or
etched onto the product. The indicia 370 may include a name, such
as a brand name, or other images, symbols, or other descriptive
matter that is related to the product or marketing of the
product.
Sensate Dualities
[0097] Some center-fill gums may include a duality based on
sensations, such as coolness, warmth and tingling sensations. Such
sensations may be provided by sensates, such as cooling agents,
warming agents and tingling agents, respectively. In some
embodiments, one of the regions of the center-fill gum may include
a first sensate and at least a second of the regions may include at
least a second sensate. The second sensate may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first sensate.
For instance, the center-fill region may include the first sensate
and the gum region may include the second sensate. The center-fill
region may include the first sensate and the coating may include
the second sensate. The gum region may include the first sensate
and the coating may include the second sensate.
[0098] In some embodiments, the center-fill region may include the
first sensate, the gum region the second sensate and the coating
may include a third sensate. The coating sensate may be the same as
the gum region sensate. In such embodiments, the center-fill
sensate may be distinct from, complementary to or different in
intensity from both the coating and gum region sensates. In other
embodiments, the coating sensate may be complementary to the gum
region sensate, but distinct from the center-fill sensate. For
example, the gum region and coating sensates may be two different
cooling agents, such as, menthol and menthyl succinate. The
center-fill sensate may be distinct from the cooling agents, such
as, for example, a tingling agent. Alternatively, the coating
sensate may be the same as the center-fill sensate. In such
embodiments, the gum region sensate may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from both the coating
and center-fill sensates. In other embodiments, the coating sensate
may be complementary to the center-fill sensate, but distinct from
the gum region sensate.
[0099] A variety of sensates may be used in any of these or other
combinations to impart different dualities. More specifically, in
some embodiments, at least two sensates that are distinct may be
employed. Dualities based on distinct sensates may include, but are
not limited to, the following combinations: a cooling agent and a
warming agent; a cooling agent and a tingling agent; and a warming
agent and a tingling agent.
[0100] In some embodiments, at least two sensates that are
complementary may be employed. In particular, the complementary
sensates may be the same type of sensate, such as, two different
cooling agents, two different warming agents or two different
tingling agents.
[0101] In some embodiments, the duality may be based on at least
two portions of a sensate that differ in intensity. Any of the
following types of sensates may be used in at least two portions,
each of which contains a different amount of the sensate: cooling
agents, warming agents or tingling agents. For example, one of the
regions of the chewing gum may include a first amount of a sensate
and a separate region may include a second amount of the same
sensate. The second amount may be greater than the first amount of
the sensate, thereby creating an intensity differential in the
sensation. It further may be desirable, in some embodiments, to
include a third portion of the same sensate in the remaining region
of the chewing gum, which is different in amount than the first
and/or second portion of the sensate.
[0102] A variety of exemplary sensates, such as cooling, warming
and tingling agents are provided in Table 2 herein. Specific
sensates may be selected from Table 2 and combined in various
manners as set forth above and in other potential combinations or
embodiments.
[0103] Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the sensates
may have a modified release profile. As described in more detail
below, components may be at least partially encapsulated to provide
a modified release profile. Suitable encapsulating materials and
methods of encapsulation are provided in more detail below in the
section entitled "Additional Components." One or all of the
sensates used in the chewing gums may be at least partially
encapsulated. Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the
sensates may include a mixture of the sensate in its encapsulated
and unencapsulated (sometimes referred to as "free") forms.
Encapsulated and unencapsulated forms of a sensate may be included
in any of the regions of the chewing gum in the same or different
amounts.
[0104] Some embodiments described herein extend to methods of
preparing multi-modality chewing gum products, which include at
least one sensation duality. In particular, a chewing gum
composition including any of the sensation dualities described
above may first be provided. The chewing gum composition may
include a center-fill region, a gum region surrounding or adjacent
to the center-fill region and optionally a third region, which may
be a coating. One of the center-fill gum regions may include at
least one first sensate and at least a second of the center-fill
gum regions may include at least one second sensate. The second
sensate may be distinct from, complementary to or different in
intensity from the first sensate. Individual chewing gum pieces
then may be formed from the chewing gum composition. Methods of
forming individual gum pieces from chewing gum compositions are
described in more detail below in the section entitled "Center-Fill
Chewing Gum Compositions." As described below, Degady, which is
referred to above, describes a suitable apparatus and method for
forming center-filled gum pellets.
[0105] In some embodiments, methods of imparting a dual sensation
perception are provided. In accordance therewith, a chewing gum
product prepared as described above may be provided. The chewing
gum product may include a center-fill region, a gum region
surrounding or adjacent to the center-fill region and optionally a
third region, which may be a coating. One of the center-fill gum
regions may include at least one first sensate and at least a
second of the center-fill gum regions may include at least one
second sensate. The second sensate may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first sensate.
The chewing gum product may be applied into the oral cavity of an
individual. As the individual chews the product and saliva mixes
therewith, the at least one first sensate and the at least one
second sensate may be released from the gum. The individual may
experience a dual sensation perception as the first and second
sensates are released and combine in the oral cavity.
[0106] Additional embodiments described herein relate to methods of
developing chewing gum products, which provide a consumer-preferred
duality, particularly a sensation duality. In accordance therewith,
a consumer preference for a dual sensation combination may first be
identified. The dual sensation combination may include at least one
first sensate and at least one second sensate, which is distinct
from, complementary to or different intensity from the first
sensate. A variety of methods may be used to identify a consumer
preference for a specific sensation duality, such as, market
research, including consumer surveys, taste panels, and the like.
Once a consumer preference for a dual sensation combination, such
as, for example, cooling and tingling, is identified, a chewing gum
product tailored to satisfy that preference may be provided. In
particular, any of the center-fill chewing gum products described
above may be prepared. The first sensate of the consumer-preferred
duality may be added to one region of the gum and the second
sensate of the consumer-preferred duality may be added to another
region of the gum. The chewing gum product may be marketed to
consumers based on the consumer-preferred duality. The product may
be marketed in a variety of manners, as described above with
respect to the marketing of flavor dualities.
Taste Dualities
[0107] Some center-fill gums may include a duality based on tastes,
such as, bitter, salty, sweet, sour, umami and kokumi tastes.
Tastants are agents that may provide such tastes. In some
embodiments, one of the regions of the center-fill gum may include
a first tastant and at least a second of the regions may include at
least a second tastant. The second tastant may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first tastant.
For instance, the center-fill region may include the first tastant
and the gum region may include the second tastant. The center-fill
region may include the first tastant and the coating may include
the second tastant. The gum region may include the first tastant
and the coating may include the second tastant.
[0108] In some embodiments, the center-fill region may include the
first tastant, the gum region the second tastant and the coating
may include a third tastant. The coating tastant may be the same as
the gum region tastant. In such embodiments, the center-fill
tastant may be distinct from, complementary to or different in
intensity from both the coating and gum region tastants. In other
embodiments, the coating tastant may be complementary to the gum
region tastant, but distinct from the center-fill tastant. For
example, the gum region and coating tastant may be two different
sweeteners, such as, sucralose and sorbitol. The center-fill
tastant may be distinct from the sweeteners, such as, for example,
a citric acid, which is a sour agent. Alternatively, the coating
tastant may be the same as the center-fill tastant. In such
embodiments, the gum region tastant may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from both the coating
and center-fill tastants. In other embodiments, the coating tastant
may be complementary to the center-fill tastant, but distinct from
the gum region tastant.
[0109] A variety of tastants may be used in any of these or other
combinations to impart different dualities. More specifically, in
some embodiments, at least two tastants that are distinct may be
employed. Dualities based on distinct tastes may include, but are
not limited to, the following combinations: a sweet tastant and a
sour tastant; a sweet tastant and a salty tastant; a sweet tastant
and a bitter tastant; a sweet tastant and an astringent tastant; a
sweet tastant and an umami tastant; a sweet tastant and a kokumi
tastant; a sour tastant and a salty tastant; a sour tastant and a
bitter tastant; a sour tastant and an astringent tastant; a sour
tastant and an umami tastant; a sour tastant and a kokumi tastant;
a salty tastant and a bitter tastant; a salty tastant and an
astringent tastant; a salty tastant and an umami tastant; a salty
tastant and a kokumi tastant; a bitter tastant and an astringent
tastant; a bitter tastant and an umami tastant; and a bitter
tastant and a kokumi tastant.
[0110] In some embodiments, at least two tastants that are
complementary may be employed. In particular, the complementary
tastants may be the same type of tastant, such as, two different
bitter agents; two different sour agents, two different sweeteners;
two different salts; two different umami agents; or two different
kokumi agents.
[0111] In some embodiments, the duality may be based on at least
two portions of a tastant that differ in intensity. Any of the
following types of tastants may be used in at least two portions,
each of which contains a different amount of the tastant: bitter
agents; sour agents, sweeteners; salts; umami agents; or kokumi
agents. For example, one of the regions of the chewing gum may
include a first amount of a tastant and a separate region may
include a second amount of the same tastant. The second amount may
be greater than the first amount of the tastant, thereby creating
an intensity differential in the taste. It further may be
desirable, in some embodiments, to include a third portion of the
same tastant in the remaining region of the chewing gum, which is
different in amount than the first and/or second portion of the
tastant.
[0112] Some of the duality combinations set forth above include an
umami tastant. "Umami" refers to a taste that is savory, or the
taste of glutamate.
[0113] Some of the duality combinations set forth above include a
kokami tastant. "Kokumi" refers to materials that impart
"mouthfulness" and "good body," as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
5,679,397 to Kuroda et al., which is incorporated in its entirety
herein by reference.
[0114] A variety of exemplary tastants, such as bitter, salty,
sweet, sour, umami and kokumi tastants are provided in Table 2
herein. Specific tastants may be selected from Table 2 and combined
in various manners as set forth above and in other combinations or
embodiments.
[0115] Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the tastants
may have a modified release profile. As described in more detail
below, components may be at least partially encapsulated to provide
a modified release profile. Suitable encapsulating materials and
methods of encapsulation are provided in more detail below in the
section entitled "Additional Components." One or all of the
tastants used in the chewing gums may be at least partially
encapsulated. Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the
tastants may include a mixture of the tastant in its encapsulated
and unencapsulated (sometimes referred to as "free") forms.
Encapsulated and unencapsulated forms of a tastant may be included
in any of the regions of the chewing gum in the same or different
amounts.
[0116] Some embodiments described herein extend to methods of
preparing multi-modality chewing gum products, which include at
least one taste duality. In particular, a chewing gum composition
including any of the taste dualities described above may first be
provided. The chewing gum composition may include a center-fill
region, a gum region surrounding or adjacent to the center-fill
region and optionally a third region, which may be a coating. One
of the center-fill gum regions may include at least one first
tastant and at least a second of the center-fill gum regions may
include at least one second tastant. The second tastant may be
distinct from, complementary to or different in intensity from the
first tastant. Individual chewing gum pieces then may be formed
from the chewing gum composition. Methods of forming individual gum
pieces from chewing gum compositions are described in more detail
below in the section entitled "Center-Fill Chewing Gum
Compositions." As described below, Degady, which is referred to
above, describes a suitable apparatus and method for forming
center-filled gum pellets.
[0117] In some embodiments, methods of imparting a dual taste
perception are provided. In accordance therewith, a chewing gum
product prepared as described above may be provided. The chewing
gum product may include a center-fill region, a gum region
surrounding or adjacent to the center-fill region and optionally a
third region, which may be a coating. One of the center-fill gum
regions may include at least one first tastant and at least a
second of the center-fill gum regions may include at least one
second tastant. The second tastant may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first tastant.
The chewing gum product may be applied into the oral cavity of an
individual. As the individual chews the product and saliva mixes
therewith, the at least one first tastant and the at least one
second tastant may be released from the gum. The individual may
experience a dual taste perception as the first and second tastants
are released and combine in the oral cavity.
[0118] Additional embodiments described herein relate to methods of
developing chewing gum products, which provide a consumer-preferred
duality, particularly a taste duality. In accordance therewith, a
consumer preference for a dual taste combination may first be
identified. The dual taste combination may include at least one
first tastant and at least one second tastant, which is distinct
from, complementary to or different intensity from the first
tastant. A variety of methods may be used to identify a consumer
preference for a specific taste duality, such as, market research,
including consumer surveys, taste panels, and the like. Once a
consumer preference for a dual taste combination, such as, for
example, bitter and astringent, is identified, a chewing gum
product tailored to satisfy that preference may be provided. In
particular, any of the center-fill chewing gum products described
above may be prepared. The first tastant of the consumer-preferred
duality may be added to one region of the gum and the second
tastant of the consumer-preferred duality may be added to another
region of the gum. The chewing gum product may be marketed to
consumers based on the consumer-preferred duality. The product may
be marketed in a variety of manners, as described above with
respect to the marketing of flavor dualities.
Functional Dualities
[0119] Some center-fill gums may include a duality based on
functionalities. Functionalities include, for example, teeth
whitening and breath freshening, among others, and may be provided
by various functional agents. In some embodiments, one of the
regions of the center-fill gum may include a first functional agent
and at least a second of the regions may include at least a second
functional agent. The second functional agent may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first
functional agent. For instance, the center-fill region may include
the first functional agent and the gum region may include the
second functional agent. The center-fill region may include the
first functional agent and the coating may include the second
functional agent. The gum region may include the first functional
agent and the coating may include the second functional agent.
[0120] In some embodiments, the center-fill region may include the
first functional agent, the gum region the second functional agent
and the coating may include a third functional agent. The coating
functional agent, in some embodiments, may be the same as the gum
region functional agent. In such embodiments, the center-fill
functional agent may be distinct from, complementary to or
different in intensity from both the coating and gum region
functional agents. In other embodiments, the coating functional
agent may be complementary to the gum region functional agent, but
distinct from the center-fill functional agent. For example, the
gum region and coating functional agents may be two different
anti-plaque agents, such as, chlorhexidine and triclosan. The
center-fill functional agent may be distinct from the anti-plaque
agents, such as, for example, a remineralization agent.
Alternatively, the coating functional agent may be the same as the
center-fill functional agent. In such embodiments, the gum region
functional agent may be distinct from, complementary to or
different in intensity from both the coating and center-fill
functional agents. In other embodiments, the coating functional
agent may be complementary to the center-fill functional agent, but
distinct from the gum region functional agent.
[0121] A variety of functional agents may be used in any of these
or other combinations to impart different dualities. More
specifically, in some embodiments, at least two functional agents
that are distinct may be employed. Dualities based on distinct
functional agents may include, but are not limited to, the
following combinations: a vitamin and a mineral; a breath
freshening agent and a tooth whitening agent; a breath freshening
agent and a remineralization agent; a breath freshening agent and
an antimicrobial agent; a tooth whitening agent and a stain
prevention agent; a remineralization agent and a demineralization
agent; an appetite suppressant and a stress relieving agent; an
energy boosting agent and a stress relieving agent; and a
concentration enhancing agent and a focus enhancing agent.
[0122] In some embodiments, at least two functional agents that are
complementary may be employed. In particular, the complementary
functional agents may be the same type of functional agent, such
as, two different surfactants, two different breath freshening
agents, two different anti-microbial agents, two different
antibacterial agents, two different anti-calculus agents, two
different anti-plaque agents, two different fluoride compounds, two
different quaternary ammonium compounds, two different
remineralization agents, two different demineralization agents, two
different pharmaceutical actives, two different micronutrients, two
different throat care actives, two different tooth whitening
agents, two different stain removing agents, two different energy
boosting agents, two different concentration boosting agents, two
different focus enhancing agents and two different appetite
suppressants.
[0123] In some embodiments, the duality may be based on at least
two portions of a functional agent that differ in intensity. Any of
the types of functional agents set forth above in the description
of complementary functional agents may be used in at least two
portions, each of which contains a different amount of the
functional agent. For example, one of the regions of the chewing
gum may include a first amount of a functional agent and a separate
region may include a second amount of the same functional agent.
The second amount may be greater than the first amount of the
functional agent, thereby creating an intensity differential in the
functionality. It further may be desirable, in some embodiments, to
include a third portion of the same functional agent in the
remaining region of the chewing gum, which is different in amount
than the first and/or second portion of the functional agent.
[0124] A variety of exemplary functional agents are provided in
Table 2 herein. Specific functional agents may be selected from
Table 2 and combined in various manners as set forth above and in
other combinations or embodiments.
[0125] Further, in some embodiments, at least one of the functional
agents may have a modified release profile. As described in more
detail below, components may be at least partially encapsulated to
provide a modified release profile. Suitable encapsulating
materials and methods of encapsulation are provided in more detail
below in the section entitled "Additional Components." One or all
of the functional agents used in the chewing gums may be at least
partially encapsulated. Further, in some embodiments, at least one
of the functional agents may include a mixture of the functional
agent in its encapsulated and unencapsulated (sometimes referred to
as "free") forms. Encapsulated and unencapsulated forms of a
functional agent may be included in any of the regions of the
chewing gum in the same or different amounts.
[0126] Some embodiments described herein extend to methods of
preparing multi-modality chewing gum products, which include at
least one functional duality. In particular, a chewing gum
composition including any of the functional dualities described
above may first be provided. The chewing gum composition may
include a center-fill region, a gum region surrounding or adjacent
to the center-fill region and optionally a third region, which may
be a coating. One of the center-fill gum regions may include at
least one first functional agent and at least a second of the
center-fill gum regions may include at least one second functional
agent. The second functional agent may be distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the first
functional agent. Individual chewing gum pieces then may be formed
from the chewing gum composition. Methods of forming individual gum
pieces from chewing gum compositions are described in more detail
below in the section entitled "Center-Fill Chewing Gum
Compositions." As described below, Degady, which is referred to
above, describes a suitable apparatus and method for forming
center-filled gum pellets.
[0127] In some embodiments, methods of imparting a dual functional
perception are provided. In accordance therewith, a chewing gum
product prepared as described above may be provided. The chewing
gum product may include a center-fill region, a gum region
surrounding or adjacent to the center-fill region and optionally a
third region, which may be a coating. One of the center-fill gum
regions may include at least one first functional agent and at
least a second of the center-fill gum regions may include at least
one second functional agent. The second functional agent may be
distinct from, complementary to or different in intensity from the
first functional agent. The chewing gum product may be applied into
the oral cavity of an individual. As the individual chews the
product and saliva mixes therewith, the at least one first
functional agent and the at least one second functional agent may
be released from the gum. The individual may experience a dual
functional perception as the first and second functional agents are
released and combine in the oral cavity.
[0128] Additional embodiments described herein relate to methods of
developing chewing gum products, which provide a consumer-preferred
duality, particularly a functional duality. In accordance
therewith, a consumer preference for a dual functional combination
may first be identified. The dual functional combination may
include at least one first functional agent and at least one second
functional agent, which is distinct from, complementary to or
different intensity from the first functional agent. A variety of
methods may be used to identify a consumer preference for a
specific functional duality, such as, market research, including
consumer surveys, taste panels, and the like. Once a consumer
preference for a dual functional combination, such as, for example,
breath freshening and stain removing, is identified, a chewing gum
product tailored to satisfy that preference may be provided. In
particular, any of the center-fill chewing gum products described
above may be prepared. The first functional agent of the
consumer-preferred duality may be added to one region of the gum
and the second functional agent of the consumer-preferred duality
may be added to another region of the gum. The chewing gum product
may be marketed to consumers based on the consumer-preferred
duality. The product may be marketed in a variety of manners, as
described above with respect to the marketing of flavor
dualities.
[0129] As mentioned above, specific flavors, sensates, tastants and
functional agents may be selected from the exemplary listing of
multi-modality components provided in Table 2 below and combined to
create any of the different dualities described above. In
particular, Table 2 is divided into the three separate regions of a
center-fill gum, i.e., coating, center-fill and gum region.
Suitable amounts for a multi-modality component when it is selected
for use in any of the three regions are set forth in Table 2. Table
2 also provides a listing of basic components typically included in
each of the three regions of a center-fill gum. Suitable amounts
for the basic components also are set forth in Table 2. The amounts
provided for the basic and multi-modality components are based on
the specified region in which the component is contained.
[0130] Further, the amounts provided for the multi-modality
components in Table 2 generally apply to a component as it may be
added to the specified region of the gum composition in a free
form, i.e., unencapsulated. In some embodiments, where the selected
multi-modality component is provided in an encapsulated form, an
amount greater than those amounts as set forth in Table 2 may be
used due to the modified release profile of the component. Also,
because a multi-modality component is selected in a specific
embodiment to create a specific duality, the amounts provided in
Table 2 represent amounts used only when the component is selected
for inclusion in the composition. In other words, the lower limit
of 0% is not included even though the multi-modality component may
not be present.
[0131] Any of the multi-modality components listed in Table 2,
below, which are selected to create a specific duality or
multi-modality in a center-fill gum composition may be added to any
region of the center-fill gum in their encapsulated and/or
unencapsulated forms.
[0132] For instance, a center-fill gum having a flavor duality may
be provided by selecting two complementary fruit flavors from Table
2 and incorporating the flavors into different regions of the gum.
A peach flavor, for example, may be incorporated into the
center-fill region and a raspberry flavor may be incorporated into
the gum region. As provided in the table, the peach flavor may be
added to the center-fill region in an amount of about 0.01% to
about 10% by weight of the center-fill region. The center-fill
region, for example, also may include the basic components for the
center-fill region in the amounts provided in the table. One or
more optional additives also may be included in the center-fill
region, such as intense sweeteners, as described in more detail
below in the section entitled "Additional Components." The
raspberry flavor, which is complementary to the peach flavor, may
be added to the gum region in an amount of about 0.5% to about 30%
by weight of the gum region, as provided in the table. The gum
region also may include the basic components in the amounts
provided in the table. One ore more optional components also may be
included in the gum region, such as bulking agents, fillers,
plasticizers, softening agents, mineral adjuvants, waxes,
emulsifiers, thickeners and other additives, such as those referred
to for the center-fill region. The center-fill gum further may be
coated with a coating composition. The coating composition may
include the basic components in the amounts provided in the table,
i.e., sugar and/or polyols, as well as optional additives, as
referred to for the center-fill region.
[0133] In another example, a center-fill gum having a functional
duality may be provided by selecting two distinct functional agents
from Table 2 and incorporating the functional agents into different
regions of the gum. Vitamin C, which is a micronutrient, may be
incorporated into the gum region and coating of the gum. Aloe vera,
which is a throat care agent, may be incorporated into the
center-fill region. As provided in the table, the vitamin C may be
added to the gum region in an amount of about 0.0001% to about 10%
by weight of the gum region. Vitamin C may be added to the coating
in an amount of about 0.0001% to about 10% by weight of the
coating. As described in the previous example, the gum region also
may include basic and optional components. The aloe vera, which
provides a distinct throat soothing function from the nutrient
function of vitamin C, may be added to the center-fill region in an
amount of about 0.1% to about 10% by weight of the center-fill
region, as provided in the table. The center-fill region also may
include basic and optional components as described in the previous
example.
[0134] As described above, Table 2 provides a list of
multi-modality components that optionally may be present in one or
more regions of the gum product. Suitable amounts that may be
present in the coating, center-fill or gum region are provided in
the table. The amounts in Table 2 are provided as ppm or weight %
in a region or layer of the gum product. Table 2 is only
representative and is not to be construed to limit the ingredients
that can be included in the gum regions in any way.
TABLE-US-00002 TABLE 2 Components Coating Center-fill Gum Region
Basic Components Sugar 0-100% 30-80% Polyol 0-100% 0-95% 30-80%
Glycerin 1-70% Natural or synthetic gum 0-1% Gum base 20-50%
Bulking agent/Filler 0-12% Plasticizer/Softening agent 0-2.5%
Mineral adjuvants 0-12% Wax 0-3.0% Emulsifier/Thickener 0-1%
Multi-Modality Components I. Sensates A. Cooling agents Menthol
10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Xylitol 5-80% 5-95% 5-80%
Erythritol 5-80% 5-95% 5-80% Menthane 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm Menthone 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
Menthyl acetate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Menthyl
salicylate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm WS-23 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm WS-3 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
Menthyl succinate (and its alkaline 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm earth metal salts) 3,1-menthoxypropane 1,2-diol
10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Glutarate esters 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm dextrose 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm sorbitol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm ketals 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm menthone ketals 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm menthone glycerol ketals 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm substituted p-menthanes 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm acyclic carboxamides 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm mono menthyl glutarate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm substituted cyclohexanamides 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm substituted cyclohexane 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm carboxamides substituted ureas and sulfonamides
10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm substituted menthanols 10-500
ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm hydroxymethyl 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm hydroxymethyl derivatives of 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm p-menthane 2-mercapto-cyclo-decanone 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm hydroxycarboxylic acids with 2-6 10-500
ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm carbon atoms cyclohexanamides 10-500
ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm 1-isopulegol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm 3-(1-menthoxy)-2-methylpropane- 10-500 ppm 10-500
ppm 500-20,000 ppm 1,2-diol p-menthane-2,3-diol 10-500 ppm 10-500
ppm 500-20,000 ppm p-menthane-3,8-diol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm 6-isopropyl-9-methyl-1,4- 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm dioxaspiro[4,5]decane-2-methanol
trimethylcyclohexanol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
N-ethyl-2-isopropyl-5- 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
methylcyclohexanecarboxamide Japanese mint oil 10-500 ppm 10-500
ppm 500-20,000 ppm peppermint oil 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm 3-(1-menthoxy)ethan-1-ol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
3-(1-menthoxy)propan-1-ol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
3-(1-menthoxy)butan-1-ol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
1-menthylacetic acid N-ethylamide 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm 1-menthyl-4-hydroxypentanoate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm 1-menthyl-3-hydroxybutyrate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm N,2,3-trimethyl-2-(1-methylethyl)- 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm butanamide n-ethyl-t-2-c-6 nonadienamide 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm N,N-dimethyl menthyl 10-500 ppm 10-500
ppm 500-20,000 ppm succinamide substituted p-menthane- 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm carboxamides 2-isopropanyl-5- 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm methylcyclohexanol menthyl lactate 10-500
ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm WS-30 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm
500-20,000 ppm WS-14 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
Eucalyptus extract 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Menthol PG
carbonate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Menthol EG carbonate
10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Menthol glyceryl ether 10-500
ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm N-tertbutyl-p-menthane-3- 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm carboxamide P-menthane-3-carboxylic acid
10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm glycerol ester
Methyl-2-isopryl-bicyclo (2.2.1) 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm Heptane-2-carboxamide 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
Menthol methyl ether 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm Methyl
glutarate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm menthyl pyrrolidone
carboxylate 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm WS-5 10-500 ppm
10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm WS-15 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm B. Warming agents vanillyl alcohol n-butylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol n-propylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol isopropylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol isobutylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol n-aminoether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol isoamylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol n-hexylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol methylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm vanillyl alcohol ethylether 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm gingerol 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm
shogaol 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm paradol 1-1000 ppm 1-1500
ppm 10-8000 ppm zingerone 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm
capsaicin 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm dihydrocapsaicin 1-1000
ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm nordihydrocapsaicin 1-1000 ppm 1-1500
ppm 10-8000 ppm homocapsaicin 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm
homodihydrocapsaicin 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm ethanol
1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm isopropyl alcohol 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm iso-amylalcohol 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm
10-8000 ppm benzyl alcohol 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm
glycerine 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm chloroform 1-1000 ppm
1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm eugenol 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm
cinnamon oil 1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm cinnamic aldehyde
1-1000 ppm 1-1500 ppm 10-8000 ppm C. Tingling agents Jambu
Oleoresin or para cress 5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm 50-5000 ppm Japanese
pepper extract 5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm 50-5000 ppm black pepper extract
5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm 50-5000 ppm Echinacea extract 5-500 ppm 5-500
ppm 50-5000 ppm Northern Prickly Ash extract 5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm
50-5000 ppm red pepper oleoresin 5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm 50-5000 ppm
effervescing agents 5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm 50-5000 ppm Spilanthol
5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm 50-5000 ppm Sanshool 5-500 ppm 5-500 ppm
50-5000 ppm II. Flavors spearmint oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% cinnamon oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% oil of
wintergreen 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% peppermint oil
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% clove oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% bay oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% anise oil
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% eucalyptus oil 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% thyme oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
cedar leaf oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% oil of nutmeg
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% allspice 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% oil of sage 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% mace
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% oil of bitter almonds 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% cassia oil 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
vanilla 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% lemon 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% orange 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% lime 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% grapefruit 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
apple 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% pear 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% peach 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% grape 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% strawberry 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
raspberry 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% cherry 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% plum 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% pineapple
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% apricot 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% watermelon 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% chocolate
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% cola 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% maple 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% dulce de leche
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% raisin 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% caramel 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% cinnamyl acetate
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% cinnamaldehyde 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% citral diethylacetal 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% dihydrocarvyl acetate 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
eugenyl formate 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% p-methylamisol
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% acetaldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% benzaldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% anisic
aldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% cinnamic aldehyde
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% citral 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% neral 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% decanal 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% ethyl vanillin 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
heliotrope 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% vanillin 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% alpha-amyl cinnamaldehyde 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% butyraldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
valeraldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% citronellal
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% decanal 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% aldehyde C-8 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% aldehyde C-9
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% aldehyde C-12 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% 2-ethyl butyraldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
hexenal 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% tolyl aldehyde 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% veratraldehyde 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
2,6-dimethyl-5-heptenal 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
2,6-dimethyloctanal 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% 2-dodecenal
0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% strawberry shortcake 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% pomegranate 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0%
beef 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% chicken 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0%
0.5-30.0% cheese 0.01-10.0% 0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% onion 0.01-10.0%
0.01-10.0% 0.5-30.0% III. Tastes A. Sweeteners sucrose 5-100%
5-100% 5-80% dextrose 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% maltose 5-100% 5-100%
5-80% dextrin 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% xylose 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% ribose
5-100% 5-100% 5-80% glucose 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% mannose 5-100%
5-100% 5-80% galactose 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% fructose 5-100% 5-100%
5-80% invert sugar 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% fructo oligo saccharide
syrups 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% partially hydrolyzed starch 5-100%
5-100% 5-80% corn syrup solids 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% sorbitol 5-100%
5-100% 5-80% xylitol 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% mannitol 5-100% 5-100%
5-80% galactitol 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% maltitol 5-100% 5-100% 5-80%
Isomalt 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% lactitol 5-100% 5-100% 5-80% erythritol
5-100% 5-100% 5-80% hydrogenated starch hydrolysate 5-100% 5-100%
5-80% stevia 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
dihydrochalcones 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm monellin
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm steviosides 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm glycyrrhizin 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000
ppm 10-20,000 ppm dihydroflavenol 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm L-aminodicarboxylic acid 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm aminoalkenoic acid ester amides sodium or calcium
saccharin salts 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm cyclamate
salts 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm sodium, ammonium or
calcium 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm salt of
3,4-dihydro-6-methyl-1,2,3- oxathiazine-4-one-2,2-dioxide
Acesulfame-K 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
free acid form of saccharin 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000
ppm Aspartame 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm Alitame
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm Neotame 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm methyl esters of L-aspartyl-L-
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm phenylglycerine and
L-aspartyl-L- 2,5-dihydrophenyl-glycine L-aspartyl-2,5-dihydro-L-
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm phenylalanine
L-aspartyl-L-(1-cyclohexen)- 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000
ppm alanine Sucralose 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
1-chloro-1'-deoxysucrose 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-D- 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
galactopyranosyl-alpha-D- fructofuranoside
4-chloro-4-deoxygalactosucrose 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm 4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-D- 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm galactopyranosyl-1-chloro-1-
deoxy-beta-D-fructo-furanoside 4,1'-dichloro-4,1'- 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm dideoxygalactosucrose
1',6'-dichloro1',6'-dideoxysucrose 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm 4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-D- 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm galactopyranosyl-1,6-dichloro-1,6-
dideoxy-beta-D-fructofuranoside 4,1',6'-trichloro-4,1',6'-
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm trideoxygalactosucrose
4,6-dichloro-4,6-dideoxy-alpha-D- 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm galactopyranosyl-6-chloro-6-
deoxy-beta-D-fructofuranoside 4,6,6'-trichloro-4,6,6'- 10-20,000
ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm trideoxygalactosucrose
6,1',6'-trichloro-6,1',6'- 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000
ppm trideoxysucrose 4,6-dichloro-4,6-dideoxy-alpha-D- 10-20,000 ppm
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm galacto-pyranosyl-1,6-dichloro-1,6-
dideoxy-beta-D-fructofuranoside 4,6,1',6'-tetrachloro4,6,1',6'-
10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm tetradeoxygalacto-sucrose
4,6,1',6'-tetradeoxy-sucrose 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000
ppm Thaumatin I and II 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm
Monatin 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm 10-20,000 ppm B. Sour acetic
acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% adipic acid 0.00005-10%
0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% ascorbic acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10%
0.00005-10% butyric acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% citric
acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% formic acid 0.00005-10%
0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% fumaric acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10%
0.00005-10% glyconic acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10%
lactic acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% phosphoric acid
0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% malic acid 0.00005-10%
0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% oxalic acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10%
0.00005-10% succinic acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10%
tartaric acid 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% 0.00005-10% C.
Bitter/Astringent quinine 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm
naringin 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm quassia 0.01-100
ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm phenyl thiocarbamide (PTC) 0.01-100
ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm 6-n-propylthiouracil (Prop) 0.01-100
ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm alum 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm
0.01-100 ppm salicin 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm
caffeine 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm 0.01-100 ppm D. Salty sodium
chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% calcium chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1%
0.01-1% potassium chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 1-lysine 0.01-1%
0.01-1% 0.01-1% IV. Functional agents A. Surfactants salts of fatty
acids selected from 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% the group consisting
of C.sub.8-C.sub.24 palmitoleic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
oleic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% eleosteric acid 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% butyric acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% caproic
acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% caprylic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% capric acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% lauric acid
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% myristic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
palmitic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% stearic acid 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% ricinoleic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
arachidic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% behenic acid 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% lignoceric acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
cerotic acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% sulfated butyl oleate
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% medium and long chain fatty acid
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% esters sodium oleate 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% salts of fumaric acid 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% potassium
glomate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% organic acid esters of mono- and
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% diglycerides stearyl monoglyceridyl
citrate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% succistearin 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% dioctyl sodium sulfosuccinate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
glycerol tristearate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% lecithin 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% hydroxylated lecithin 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
sodium lauryl sulfate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% acetylated
monoglycerides 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% succinylated
monoglycerides 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% monoglyceride citrate
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% ethoxylated mono- and 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% diglycerides sorbitan monostearate 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% calcium stearyl-2-lactylate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
sodium stearyl lactylate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% lactylated
fatty acid esters of 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% glycerol and
propylene glycerol glycerol-lactoesters of C8-C24 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% fatty acids polyglycerol esters of C8-C24 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% fatty acids propylene glycol alginate 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% sucrose C8-C24 fatty acid esters 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% diacetyl tartaric and citric acid 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% esters of mono- and diglycerides triacetin
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% sarcosinate surfactants 0.001-2%
0.001-2% 0.001-2% isethionate surfactants 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% tautate surfactants 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% pluronics
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% polyethylene oxide condensates of
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% alkyl phenols products derived from the
0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% condensation of ethylene oxide with the
reaction product of propylene oxide and ethylene diamine ethylene
oxide condensates of 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% aliphatic alcohols
long chain tertiary amine oxides 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% long
chain tertiary phosphine 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% oxides long
chain dialkyl sulfoxides 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% B. Breath
freshening agents spearmint oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
peppermint oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% wintergreen oil
0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% sassafras oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
0.001-10% chlorophyll oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% citral oil
0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% geraniol oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
0.001-10% cardamom oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% clove oil
0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% sage oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
0.001-10% carvacrol oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% eucalyptus
oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% cardamom oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
0.001-10% magnolia bark extract oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
marjoram oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% cinnamon oil 0.001-10%
0.001-10% 0.001-10% lemon oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% lime
oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% grapefruit oil 0.001-10%
0.001-10% 0.001-10% orange oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
cinnamic aldehyde 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% salicylaldehyde
0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% menthol 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
carvone 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% iso-garrigol 0.001-10%
0.001-10% 0.001-10% anethole 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% zinc
citrate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc acetate 0.01-25% 0.01-25%
0.1-15% zinc fluoride 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc ammonium
sulfate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc bromide 0.01-25% 0.01-25%
0.1-15% zinc iodide 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc chloride
0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc nitrate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15%
zinc flurosilicate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc gluconate
0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc tartarate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15%
zinc succinate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc formate 0.01-25%
0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc chromate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc
phenol sulfonate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc dithionate 0.01-25%
0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc sulfate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% silver
nitrate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% zinc salicylate 0.01-25% 0.01-25%
0.1-15% zinc glycerophosphate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% copper
nitrate 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% chlorophyll 0.01-25% 0.01-25%
0.1-15% copper chlorophyll 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% chlorophyllin
0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% hydrogenated cottonseed oil 0.5-5%
0.5-70% 0.5-15% chlorine dioxide 0.025-0.50% 0.025-0.50%
0.025-0.50% beta cyclodextrin 0.1-5% 0.1-5% 0.1-5% zeolite 0.1-5%
0.1-5% 0.1-5% silica-based materials 0.1-5% 0.1-5% 0.1-5%
carbon-based materials 0.1-5% 0.1-5% 0.1-5% enzymes such as
laccase, papain, 0.1-5% 0.1-5% 0.1-5% krillase, amylase, glucose
oxidase C. Anti-microbial agents cetylpyridinium chloride 0.01-1%
0.01-1% 0.01-1% zinc compounds 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% copper
compounds 0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% D. Antibacterial agents
chlorhexidine 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% alexidine 0.0025-2%
0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% quaternary ammonium salts 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2%
0.0025-2% benzethonium chloride 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% cetyl
pyridinium chloride 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2%
2,4,4'-trichloro-2'-hydroxy- 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% diphenyl
ether (triclosan) E. Anti-calculus agents pyrophosphates 1-6% 1-6%
1-6% triphosphates 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% polyphosphates 0.1-10%
0.1-10% 0.1-10% polyphosphonates 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% dialkali
metal pyrophosphate salt 1-6% 1-6% 1-6% tetra alkali polyphosphate
salt 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% tetrasodium pyrophosphate 1-6% 1-6%
1-6% tetrapotassium pyrophosphate 1-6% 1-6% 1-6% sodium
tripolyphosphate 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% F. Anti-plaque agents
chlorhexidine 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% 0.0025-2% triclosan 0.01-2%
0.01-2% 0.01-2% hexetidine 0.01-2% 0.01-2% 0.01-2% zinc citrate
0.01-25% 0.01-25% 0.1-15% essential oils 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
0.001-10% sodium lauryl sulfate 0.001-2% 0.001-2% 0.001-2% G.
Fluoride compounds sodium fluoride 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% sodium
monofluorophosphate 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% stannous fluoride
0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% H. Quaternary ammonium compounds
Benzalkonium Chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% Benzethonium Chloride
0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% Cetalkonium Chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1%
0.01-1% Cetrimide 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% Cetrimonium Bromide
0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% Cetylpyridinium Chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1%
0.01-1% Glycidyl Trimethyl Ammonium 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1%
Chloride Stearalkonium Chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% I.
Remineralization agents phosphopeptide-amorphous 0.1-5% 0.1-5%
0.1-5%
calcium phosphate casein phosphoprotein-calcium 0.1-5% 0.1-5%
0.1-5% phosphate complex casein phosphopeptide-stabilized 0.1-5%
0.1-5% 0.1-5% calcium phosphate J. Pharmaceutical actives drugs or
medicaments 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% vitamins and other
dietary 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% supplements minerals
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% caffeine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% nicotine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% fruit juices
2-10% 2-60% 1-15% K. Micronutrients vitamin A 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% vitamin D 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% vitamin E
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% vitamin K 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% vitamin C (ascorbic acid) 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% B vitamins (thiamine or B1, 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% riboflavoin or B2, niacin or B3, pyridoxine or B6, folic
acid or B9, cyanocobalimin or B12, pantothenic acid, biotin) sodium
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% magnesium 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% chromium 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% iodine
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% iron 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% manganese 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% calcium
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% copper 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% fluoride 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% potassium
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% phosphorous 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% molybdenum 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% selenium
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% zinc 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% L-carnitine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% choline
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% coenzyme Q10 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% alpha-lipoic acid 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
omega-3-fatty acids 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% pepsin
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% phytase 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% trypsin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% lipases
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% proteases 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% cellulases 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% ascorbic
acid 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% citric acid 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% rosemary oil 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
vitamin A 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% vitamin E phosphate
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% tocopherols 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% di-alpha-tocopheryl phosphate 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% tocotrienols 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% alpha
lipoic acid 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% dihydrolipoic acid
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% xanthophylls 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% beta cryptoxanthin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
lycopene 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% lutein 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% zeaxanthin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
beta-carotene 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% carotenes 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% mixed carotenoids 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% polyphenols 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% flavonoids
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% cartotenoids 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% chlorophyll 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
chlorophyllin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% fiber 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% anthocyanins 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
cyaniding 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% delphinidin 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% malvidin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
pelargonidin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% peonidin 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% petunidin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
flavanols 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% flavonols 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% catechin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
epicatechin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% epigallocatechin
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% epigallocatechingallate 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% theaflavins 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
thearubigins 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% proanthocyanins
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% quercetin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% kaempferol 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% myricetin
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% isorhamnetin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% flavononeshesperetin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
naringenin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% eriodictyol 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% tangeretin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
flavones 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% apigenin 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% luteolin 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
lignans 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% phytoestrogens 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% resveratrol 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
isoflavones 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% daidzein 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% genistein 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
soy isoflavones 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% L. Throat care
actives (1) analgesics, anesthetics, antipyretic and anti-
inflammatory agents menthol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000 ppm
phenol 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% hexylresorcinol 0.1-10% 0.1-50%
0.1-20% benzocaine 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% dyclonine hydrochloride
0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% benzyl alcohol 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20%
salicyl alcohol 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% acetaminophen 0.1-10%
0.1-50% 0.1-20% aspirin 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% diclofenac 0.1-10%
0.1-50% 0.1-20% diflunisal 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% etodolac 0.1-10%
0.1-50% 0.1-20% fenoprofen 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% flurbiprofen
0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% ibuprofen 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20%
ketoprofen 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% ketorolac 0.1-10% 0.1-50%
0.1-20% nabumetone 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% naproxen 0.1-10% 0.1-50%
0.1-20% piroxicam 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% caffeine 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% lidocaine 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% benzocaine
0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% phenol 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% dyclonine
0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% benzonotate 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% (2)
demulcents slippery elm bark 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% pectin 0.1-10%
0.1-10% 0.1-10% gelatin 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% (3) antiseptics
cetylpyridinium chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% domiphen bromide
0.01-1% 0.01-1% 0.01-1% dequalinium chloride 0.01-1% 0.01-1%
0.01-1% (4) antitussives chlophedianol hydrochloride 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% codeine 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% codeine
phosphate 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% codeine sulfate 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% dextromethorphan 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
dextromethorphan hydrobromide 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
diphenhydramine citrate 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
diphenhydramine hydrochloride 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
dextrorphan 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% diphenhydramine 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% hydrocodone 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
noscapine 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% oxycodone 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% pentoxyverine 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% (5)
throat soothing agents honey 0.5-25% 0.5-90% 0.5-15% propolis
0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% aloe vera 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% glycerine
0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% menthol 10-500 ppm 10-500 ppm 500-20,000
ppm (6) cough suppressants codeine 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
antihistamines 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% dextromethorphan
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% isoproterenol 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% (7) expectorants ammonium chloride 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% guaifenesin 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% ipecac fluid
extract 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% potassium iodide 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% (8) mucolytics acetylcycsteine 0.0001-2%
0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% ambroxol 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2%
bromhexine 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% 0.0001-2% (9) antihistamines
acrivastine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% azatadine 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
0.05-10% brompheniramine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
chlorpheniramine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% clemastine 0.05-10%
0.05-10% 0.05-10% cyproheptadine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
dexbrompheniramine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% dimenhydrinate
0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% diphenhydramine 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
0.05-10% doxylamine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% hydroxyzine 0.05-10%
0.05-10% 0.05-10% meclizine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% phenindamine
0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% phenyltoloxamine 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
0.05-10% promethazine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% pyrilamine
0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% tripelennamine 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
0.05-10% triprolidine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% astemizole
0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% cetirizine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
ebastine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% fexofenadine 0.05-10% 0.05-10%
0.05-10% loratidine 0.05-10% 0.05-10% 0.05-10% terfenadine 0.05-10%
0.05-10% 0.05-10% (10) nasal decongestants phenylpropanolamine
0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% pseudoephedrine 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20%
ephedrine 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% phenylephrine 0.1-10% 0.1-50%
0.1-20% oxymetazoline 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% menthol 0.1-10%
0.1-50% 0.1-20% camphor 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% borneol 0.1-10%
0.1-50% 0.1-20% ephedrine 0.1-10% 0.1-50% 0.1-20% eucalyptus oil
0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% peppermint oil 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
0.001-10% methyl salicylate 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% bornyl
acetate 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% lavender oil 0.001-10%
0.001-10% 0.001-10% wasabi extracts 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10%
horseradish extracts 0.001-10% 0.001-10% 0.001-10% M. Tooth
whitening/Stain removing agents surfactants 0.001-2% 0.001-2%
0.001-2% chelators 0.1-10% 0.1-10% 0.1-10% abrasives 0.1-5% 0.1-5%
0.1-5% oxidizing agents 0.1-5% 0.1-5% 0.1-5% hydrolytic agents
0.1-5% 0.1-5% 0.1-5% N. Energy boosting agents caffeine 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% vitamins 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
minerals 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% amino acids 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% ginseng extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% ginko extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% guarana
extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% green tea extract
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% taurine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% kola nut extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% yerba
mate leaf 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% Niacin 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% rhodiola root extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% O. Concentration boosting agents caffeine 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% ginko extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% gotu cola (centella asiatica) 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% German chamomile 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% avina
sativa 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% phosphatidyl serine
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
aspalathus linearis 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% pregnenolone
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% rhodiola root extract 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% theanine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
vinpocetine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% P. Appetite
suppressants caffeine 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% guarana
extract 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% hoodia gordonii 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% glucomannan 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
calcium 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% garcinia cambogia extract
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% n-acetyl-tyrosine 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% 0.0001-10% soy phospholipids 0.0001-10% 0.0001-10%
0.0001-10% V. Colors Annatto extract 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10%
Beta-carotene 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Canthaxanthin 0.5-10% 0.5-20%
0.5-10% Grape color extract 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Turmeric
oleoresin 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% B-Apo-8'-carotenal 0.5-10%
0.5-20% 0.5-10% Beet powder 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Caramel color
0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Carmine 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Cochineal
extract 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Grape skin extract 0.5-10% 0.5-20%
0.5-10% Saffron 0.5-10% 0.5-20% 0.5-10% Tumeric 0.5-10% 0.5-20%
0.5-10% Titanium dioxide 0.05-2% 0.05-2% 0.05-2% F.D. & C. Blue
No. 1 0.05-2% 0.05-2% 0.05-2% F.D.& C. Blue No. 2 0.05-2%
0.05-2% 0.05-2% F.D.& C. Green No. 1 0.05-2% 0.05-2% 0.05-2%
F.D. & C. Red No. 40 0.05-2% 0.05-2% 0.05-2% F.D. & C. Red
No. 3 0.05-2% 0.05-2% 0.05-2% F.D. & C. Yellow No. 6 0.05-2%
0.05-2% 0.05-2% F.D. & C. Yellow No. 5 0.05-2% 0.05-2%
0.05-2%
[0135] As mentioned above, some embodiments described herein may
include more than one duality in the chewing gum composition. Such
compositions may be referred to as multi-modality compositions. In
some embodiments, more than one duality of the same type may be
included, such as, two different flavor dualities. Alternatively,
different types of dualities may be combined in a single chewing
gum composition. For instance, a flavor duality and a sensation
duality may be used together. Further, three or even four of the
different duality types may be included in one chewing gum
composition in some embodiments.
Center-Fill Chewing Gum Compositions
[0136] As described in detail herein, components that create the
dualities described above may be added to the same or different
regions of a center-fill gum composition. Center-fill gum
compositions may include a center-fill region and a gum region,
which includes a gum base. The gum region may at least partially
surround or be positioned adjacent to the center-fill region.
Optionally, a third region, or a coating, may at least partially
surround the gum region.
[0137] In some embodiments, the gum region may have a non-uniform
thickness. In particular, the gum region in layered configuration
embodiments may be thinner on the ends than on the sides of the gum
piece.
[0138] The center-fill region of the gum composition may be a
liquid, solid or semi-solid, gas, or the like. Embodiments that
include a liquid center-fill composition, as well as some
semi-solid center-fill compositions, may involve concerns regarding
retention of the liquid center during manufacturing and shelf-life,
as mentioned above. It may be desirable, therefore, to employ gum
region compositions with liquid-fill gums that substantially reduce
or prevent leaking of the liquid center. Suitable gum region
compositions are discussed in detail below.
[0139] Non-liquid, i.e., solid, some semi-solid and gaseous
center-fill regions, however, may not involve leaking concerns.
Accordingly, gum region compositions that may exhibit leaking
problems when combined with liquid centers may be suitable for use
with non-liquid centers. As such, in addition to the gum region
compositions discussed below for use with liquid centers, any
conventional chewing gum composition may be employed in the gum
region in non-liquid center-fill embodiments.
[0140] In some embodiments, the composition in the center-fill may
be lipophilic. In such embodiments, it may be desirable to adjust
the gum region composition to account for such compositions. In
particular, in some embodiments, the gum base used in the gum
region composition may be adjusted to include higher proportions of
fat when the center-fill composition is lipophilic.
[0141] In some embodiments, the center-fill region may be
substantially or completely filled with the liquid, solid,
semi-solid or gaseous center-fill composition. In some other
embodiments, the center-fill region may be only partially filled
with the liquid, solid, semi-solid or gaseous center-fill
composition.
[0142] In some embodiments, the center-fill region may include two
or more center-fill compositions. The two or more center-fill
compositions may be the same or different forms. For example, some
embodiments may contain a mixture of two or more distinct liquids,
which may or may not be miscible. Similarly, some embodiments may
contain two or more distinct solids, semi-solids or gasses in the
center-fill region. Mixtures of different center-fill forms also
may be included in some embodiments. For example, a liquid and a
solid may be included in the center-fill region. The two or more
liquids, solids, semi-solids and/or gasses employed in the
center-fill region may be included in the same or different amounts
and may have similar or distinct characteristics. More
specifically, in some embodiments, the two or more center-fill
compositions may differ in a variety of characteristics, such as,
viscosity, color, flavor, taste, texture, sensation, ingredient
components, functional components, sweeteners, or the like.
[0143] In some embodiments, the center-fill composition also may
include non-liquid components, such as, for example, flavor beads,
fruit particles, nut particles, flavor particles, gelatin beads or
portions, and the like.
[0144] The center-fill gum composition and other compositions
described herein may be formed by any technique known in the art
which includes the method described by U.S. Pat. No. 6,280,780 to
Degady et al. ("Degady"), referred to above. Degady describes an
apparatus and method for forming center-filled gum pellets. The
method includes first extruding a liquid-filled rope of a chewing
gum layer and passing the rope through a sizing mechanism including
a series of pairs of pulley-shaped roller members. The roller
members "size" the rope or strand of gum material such that it
leaves the series of rollers with the desired size and shape for
entering a tablet-forming mechanism.
[0145] The rope is then led into a tablet-forming mechanism
including a pair of rotating chain die members which are endless
chain mechanisms and both rotate at the same speed by a motor and
gear mechanism. Each of the chain mechanisms include a plurality of
open curved die groove members which mate and form die cavities in
which the pieces of gum material (pellets or tablets) are formed.
While Degady is limited to the formation of pellet or tablet shaped
pieces, the gum pieces may be of other shapes as described above.
The shape of the die groove members may be altered to provide any
desired shape.
[0146] The gum may optionally be passed through a cooling tunnel
either before entering the tablet-forming mechanism, after exiting
the tablet-forming mechanism or both. Cooling of the rope prior to
entering the tablet-forming mechanism may be beneficial to prevent
rebound of the individual pieces and thus may provide an increase
in productivity.
[0147] The cooled pieces of gum material are then fed into a
storage container for conditioning and further processing. At this
point, the cooled pieces of gum material could also be fed directly
into a coating tunnel mechanism, such as a rotating tunnel
mechanism.
[0148] Whether the pieces of formed gum material are first stored,
transported in a storage container, or fed directly into a coating
tunnel or mechanism, the individual pieces of gum material may
subsequently be subjected to a conventional sugar or sugarless
coating process in order to form a hard exterior shell on the
liquid-filled gum material. A variety of coating processes or
mechanisms of this type are known. In some embodiments, the coating
is applied in numerous thin layers of material in order to form an
appropriate uniform coated and finished quality surface on the gum
products. The hard coating material, which may include sugar,
maltitol, sorbitol or any other polyol, including those described
herein, and optionally flavoring, is sprayed onto the pellets of
gum material as they pass through a coating mechanism or a coating
tunnel and are tumbled and rotated therein. In addition,
conditioned air is circulated or forced into the coating tunnel or
mechanism in order to dry each of the successive coating layers on
the formed products. In some embodiments, the coating, or outermost
region, can be formed by lamination, dual or multiple extrusion, or
any other process that creates an outermost region.
[0149] The coating composition may range from about 2% to about
80%, more specifically, about 20% to about 40% by weight of an
individual gum piece which includes a center-fill, a gum region and
a coating; even more specifically, from 25% to 35% and still more
specifically around 30%. The coating may include sugar or polyol
such as maltitol as the primary component, but may also include
flavors, colors, etc. as described below in the discussion of the
gum region. The coating or outermost region may be crystalline or
amorphous.
[0150] In some embodiments, the center-filled chewing gum provides
resistance from moisture migration from the center-fill to the gum
region by modifying both the saccharide or polyol composition and
gum base composition present in the gum region. This is
particularly relevant for liquid-fill chewing gum embodiments. This
is in contrast to the aforementioned conventional approaches and
which have not fully addressed the problems associated with
manufacturing and shelf-stability of liquid center-filled
products.
[0151] In some embodiments of the invention, there are included
smaller piece-sizes. For example, the smallest conventional piece
sizes of commercially available gum are generally in pellet forms.
These piece-sizes currently range from about 5-7 grams. In some
embodiments liquid filled products have been made using
substantially smaller piece sizes, i.e., 50-60% smaller by weight,
without loss of liquidity or migration of liquid into the gum
region or beyond into the coating. Some inventive embodiments
provide a liquid-filled gum piece size range which is greater than
about 0.5 grams, more specifically greater than 1.5 grams up to
about 3 grams, including the addition of an outer hard coating
shell. In addition, in some embodiments a gum piece may include a
center-fill, a gum region including a gum base and an outer
coating. Such gum pieces may be about 2.2 grams total weight per
piece.
[0152] With respect to liquid-fill embodiments, it has been
discovered that pieces of such small size and particularly with gum
shapes or configurations having proportionally more liquid-fill
surface area as compared to the weight of the liquid per se, have a
greater tendency to lose the liquidity of the center due to the
interaction of different factors. While not limited to a single
theory, these factors include the small amount of liquid-fill in
comparison to the surface of the gum region in which the
liquid-fill is in direct contact, the interaction of the type of
elastomer with the center-fill (i.e. SBR versus non-SBR), the
compatibility of the gum region components with the liquid-fill
components, and the potential capillary action of the polyol used
in the gum region. For example, the structure of sorbitol, which is
customarily used in gum formulations in the United States, does not
provide a tightly packed crystalline structure, giving almost a
sponge-like appearance. Therefore, in order to provide a
center-filled gum piece of less than about 3 grams, the present
invention alters the gum and gum base in some embodiments to
include a polyol composition having a dense, tightly packed
crystalline structure which is unlike the sponge-like structure in
conventional sorbitol gum region formulations, in order to provide
a center-filled gum piece which resists loss of liquidity.
[0153] For other useful center-fill gum compositions and/or
components for use therein, see the following co-pending commonly
owned patent applications, the contents of which are incorporated
herein by reference in their entirety: U.S. Application No.
60/776,748, filed on Feb. 24, 2006, entitled "Liquid-Filled Chewing
Gum Composition"; U.S. Application No. 60/776,642, filed on Feb.
24, 2006, entitled "Liquid-Filled Chewing Gum Composition"; U.S.
Application No. 60/776,641, filed on Feb. 24, 2006, entitled
"Liquid-Filled Chewing Gum Composition"; U.S. Application No.
60/776,508, filed on Feb. 24, 2006, entitled "Center-Filled Chewing
Gum with Barrier Layer"; U.S. Application No. 60/776,382, filed on
Feb. 24, 2006, entitled "Center-Filled Chewing Gum Composition";
and U.S. Application No. 60/776,637, filed on Feb. 24, 2006,
entitled "Center-Filled Chewing Gum Composition".
Gum Region
[0154] The gum region, also referred to as the second region in the
claims, may include one or more cavities therein to house the
center-fill. The shape of the cavity will be largely dictated by
the final configuration of the chewing gum piece. The gum region
also may include a gum base.
[0155] In some liquid-fill embodiments, the gum region may provide
a liquid barrier to surround and prevent the liquid-fill from
migration and premature release. By selection of the ratio of the
desired cavity surface area to the liquid-fill weight, optimization
of the reduction in potential liquid-fill migration in to the gum
region area can be achieved. This is particularly useful when the
gum piece size is desired to be substantially smaller than
conventional commercialized gum pieces. In particular,
liquid-filled pellet gums having sizes of 2 to 3 grams by weight of
the entire gum piece have been successfully made. However, smaller
gum pieces, as small as about 0.5 grams are contemplated.
[0156] Some embodiments, particularly liquid-fill embodiments, may
incorporate a modified polyol composition including at least one
polyol incorporated into the gum region as discussed herein.
Moreover, the selection of a non-SBR gum base in the gum region, in
combination with the modified polyol composition has been found to
be particularly useful in achieving stable liquid-filled chewing
gum compositions.
[0157] As mentioned above, the gum region may include a gum base.
The gum base may include any component known in the chewing gum
art. For example, the gum region may include elastomers, bulking
agents, waxes, elastomer solvents, emulsifiers, plasticizers,
fillers and mixtures thereof. Wherein the gum region is included in
a three component composition including a center-fill, a gum region
and a coating layer, the gum region may comprise from about 40% to
about 97%, more specifically from about 55% to about 65% by weight
of the chewing gum piece, even more specifically about 62%.
[0158] The amount of the gum base which is present in the gum
region may also vary. In some embodiments, the gum base may be
included in the gum region in an amount from about 25% to about 45%
by weight of the gum region. A more specific range of gum base in
some embodiments may be from about 28% to about 42% by weight of
the gum region. Even more. specifically, the range may be from
about 28% to about 35% or from about 28% to about 30% in some
embodiments. Alternatively, in some high gum base embodiments, the
gum base may be present in an amount from about 45% to about 100%
by weight of the gum region.
[0159] The elastomers (rubbers) employed in the gum base will vary
greatly depending upon various factors such as the type of gum base
desired, the consistency of gum composition desired and the other
components used in the composition to make the final chewing gum
product. The elastomer may be any water-insoluble polymer known in
the art, and includes those gum polymers utilized for chewing gums
and bubble gums. Illustrative examples of suitable polymers in gum
bases include both natural and synthetic elastomers. For example,
those polymers which are suitable in gum base compositions include,
without limitation, natural substances (of vegetable origin) such
as chicle, natural rubber, crown gum, nispero, rosidinha, jelutong,
perillo, niger gutta, tunu, balata, guttapercha, lechi capsi,
sorva, gutta kay, and the like, and combinations thereof. Examples
of synthetic elastomers include, without limitation,
styrene-butadiene copolymers (SBR), polyisobutylene,
isobutylene-isoprene copolymers, polyethylene, polyvinyl acetate
and the like, and combinations thereof.
[0160] Additional useful polymers include: crosslinked polyvinyl
pyrrolidone, polymethylmethacrylate; copolymers of lactic acid,
polyhydroxyalkanoates, plasticized ethylcellulose, polyvinyl
acetatephthalate and combinations thereof.
[0161] The amount of elastomer employed in the gum base may vary
depending upon various factors such as the type of gum base used,
the consistency of the gum composition desired and the other
components used in the composition to make the final chewing gum
product. In general, the elastomer will be present in the gum base
in an amount from about 10% to about 60% by weight of the gum
region, desirably from about 35% to about 40% by weight.
[0162] In some embodiments, the gum base may include wax. It
softens the polymeric elastomer mixture and improves the elasticity
of the gum base. When present, the waxes employed will have a
melting point below about 60.degree. C., and preferably between
about 45.degree. C. and about 55.degree. C. The low melting wax may
be a paraffin wax. The wax may be present in the gum base in an
amount from about 6% to about 10%, and preferably from about 7% to
about 9.5%, by weight of the gum base.
[0163] In addition to the low melting point waxes, waxes having a
higher melting point may be used in the gum base in amounts up to
about 5%, by weight of the gum base. Such high melting waxes
include beeswax, vegetable wax, candelilla wax, carnuba wax, most
petroleum waxes, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
[0164] In addition to the components set out above, the gum base
may include a variety of other ingredients, such as components
selected from elastomer solvents, emulsifiers, plasticizers,
fillers, and mixtures thereof.
[0165] The gum base may contain elastomer solvents to aid in
softening the elastomer component. Such elastomer solvents may
include those elastomer solvents known in the art, for example,
terpinene resins such as polymers of alpha-pinene or beta-pinene,
methyl, glycerol and pentaerythritol esters of rosins and modified
rosins and gums such as hydrogenated, dimerized and polymerized
rosins, and mixtures thereof. Examples of elastomer solvents
suitable for use herein may include the pentaerythritol ester of
partially hydrogenated wood and gum rosin, the pentaerythritol
ester of wood and gum rosin, the glycerol ester of wood rosin, the
glycerol ester of partially dimerized wood and gum rosin, the
glycerol ester of polymerized wood and gum rosin, the glycerol
ester of tall oil rosin, the glycerol ester of wood and gum rosin
and the partially hydrogenated wood and gum rosin and the partially
hydrogenated methyl ester of wood and rosin, and the like, and
mixtures thereof. The elastomer solvent may be employed in the gum
base in amounts from about 2% to about 15%, and preferably from
about 7% to about 11%, by weight of the gum base.
[0166] The gum base may also include emulsifiers which aid in
dispersing the imrnmiscible components into a single stable system.
The emulsifiers useful in this invention include glyceryl
monostearate, lecithin, fatty acid monoglycerides, diglycerides,
propylene glycol monostearate, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
The emulsifier may be employed in amounts from about 2% to about
15%, and more specifically, from about 7% to about 11%, by weight
of the gum base.
[0167] The gum base may also include plasticizers or softeners to
provide a variety of desirable textures and consistency properties.
Because of the low molecular weight of these ingredients, the
plasticizers and softeners are able to penetrate the fundamental
structure of the gum base making it plastic and less viscous.
Useful plasticizers and softeners include lanolin, palmitic acid,
oleic acid, stearic acid, sodium stearate, potassium stearate,
glyceryl triacetate, glyceryl lecithin, glyceryl monostearate,
propylene glycol monostearate, acetylated monoglyceride, glycerine,
and the like, and mixtures thereof. Waxes, for example, natural and
synthetic waxes, hydrogenated vegetable oils, petroleum waxes such
as polyurethane waxes, polyethylene waxes, paraffin waxes,
microcrystalline waxes, fatty waxes, sorbitan monostearate, tallow,
propylene glycol, mixtures thereof, and the like, may also be
incorporated into the gum base. The plasticizers and softeners are
generally employed in the gum base in amounts up to about 20% by
weight of the gum base, and more specifically in amounts from about
9% to about 17%, by weight of the gum base.
[0168] Plasticizers also include are the hydrogenated vegetable
oils and include soybean oil and cottonseed oil which may be
employed alone or in combination. These plasticizers provide the
gum base with good texture and soft chew characteristics. These
plasticizers and softeners are generally employed in amounts from
about 5% to about 14%, and more specifically in amounts from about
5% to about 13.5%, by weight of the gum base.
[0169] Anhydrous glycerin may also be employed as a softening
agent, such as the commercially available United States
Pharmacopeia (USP) grade. Glycerin is a syrupy liquid with a sweet
warm taste and has a sweetness of about 60% of that of cane sugar.
Because glycerin is hygroscopic, the anhydrous glycerin may be
maintained under anhydrous conditions throughout the preparation of
the chewing gum composition.
[0170] In some embodiments, the gum base of this invention may also
include effective amounts of bulking agents such as mineral
adjuvants which may serve as fillers and textural agents. Useful
mineral adjuvants include calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate,
alumina, aluminum hydroxide, aluminum silicate, talc, tricalcium
phosphate, dicalcium phosphate, calcium sulfate and the like, and
mixtures thereof These fillers or adjuvants may be used in the gum
base compositions in various amounts. The amount of filler, may be
present in an amount from about zero to about 40%, and more
specifically from about zero to about 30%, by weight of the gum
base. In some embodiments, the amount of filler will be from about
zero to about 15%, more specifically from about 3% to about
11%.
[0171] A variety of traditional ingredients may be optionally
included in the gum base in effective amounts such as coloring
agents, antioxidants, preservatives, flavoring agents, high
intensity sweeteners, and the like. For example, titanium dioxide
and other dyes suitable for food, drug and cosmetic applications,
known as F. D. & C. dyes, may be utilized. An anti-oxidant such
as butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA),
propyl gallate, and mixtures thereof, may also be included. Other
conventional chewing gum additives known to one having ordinary
skill in the chewing gum art may also be used in the gum base. A
variety of components which may be added to the gum region, or
alternatively to the liquid-fill region or coating are described in
greater detail in the section entitled "Additional Components"
hereinbelow.
[0172] Some embodiments extend to methods of making the center-fill
gum compositions. The manner in which the gum base components are
mixed is not critical and is performed using standard techniques
and apparatus known to those skilled in the art. In a typical
method, an elastomer is admixed with an elastomer solvent and/or a
plasticizer and/or an emulsifier and agitated for a period of from
1 to 30 minutes. The remaining ingredients, such as the low melting
point wax, are then admixed, either in bulk or incrementally, while
the gum base mixture is blended again for 1 to 30 minutes.
[0173] The gum composition may include amounts of conventional
additives selected from the group consisting of sweetening agents
(sweeteners), plasticizers, softeners, emulsifiers, waxes, fillers,
bulking agents (carriers, extenders, bulk sweeteners), mineral
adjuvants, flavoring agents (flavors, flavorings), coloring agents
(colorants, colorings), antioxidants, acidulants, thickeners,
medicaments, and the like, and mixtures thereof. Some of these
additives may serve more than one purpose. For example, in
sugarless gum compositions, a sweetener, such as maltitol or other
sugar alcohol, may also function as a bulking agent.
[0174] The plasticizers, softening agents, mineral adjuvants, waxes
and antioxidants discussed above, as being suitable for use in the
gum base, may also be used in the chewing gum composition. Examples
of other conventional additives which may be used include
emulsifiers, such as lecithin and glyceryl monostearate,
thickeners, used alone or in combination with other softeners, such
as methyl cellulose, alginates, carrageenan, xanthan gum, gelatin,
carob, tragacanth, locust bean gum, pectin, alginates,
galactomannans such as guar gum, carob bean gum, glucomannan,
gelatin, starch, starch derivatives, dextrins and cellulose
derivatives such as carboxy methyl cellulose, acidulants such as
malic acid, adipic acid, citric acid, tartaric acid, fumaric acid,
and mixtures thereof, and fillers, such as those discussed above
under the category of mineral adjuvants.
[0175] In some embodiments, the gum region may also contain a
bulking agent. Suitable bulking agents may be water-soluble and
include sweetening agents selected from, but not limited to,
monosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides, sugar alcohols,
and mixtures thereof; randomly bonded glucose polymers such as
those polymers distributed under the tradename Litesse.TM. which is
the brand name for polydextrose and is manufactured by Danisco
Sweeteners, Ltd. of 41-51 Brighton Road, Redhill, Surryey, RH1 6YS,
United Kingdom.; isomalt (a racemic mixture of
alpha-D-glucopyranosyl-1,6-mannitol and
alpha-D-glucopyranosyl-1,6-sorbitol manufactured under the
tradename PALATINIT by Palatinit Sussungsmittel GmbH of
Gotlieb-Daimler-Strause 12 a, 68165 Mannheim, Germany);
maltodextrins; hydrogenated starch hydrolysates; hydrogenated
hexoses; hydrogenated disaccharides; minerals, such as calcium
carbonate, talc, titanium dioxide, dicalcium phosphate; celluloses;
and mixtures thereof.
[0176] Suitable sugar bulking agents include monosaccharides,
disaccharides and polysaccharides such as xylose, ribulose, glucose
(dextrose), lactose, mannose, galactose, fructose (levulose),
sucrose (sugar), maltose, invert sugar, partially hydrolyzed starch
and corn syrup solids, and mixtures thereof.
[0177] Suitable sugar alcohol bulking agents include sorbitol,
xylitol, mannitol, galactitol, lactitol, maltitol, erythritol,
isomalt and mixtures thereof.
[0178] Suitable hydrogenated starch hydrolysates include those
disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,279,931 and various hydrogenated
glucose syrups and/or powders which contain sorbitol, maltitol,
hydrogenated disaccharides, hydrogenated higher polysaccharides, or
mixtures thereof. Hydrogenated starch hydrolysates are primarily
prepared by the controlled catalytic hydrogenation of corn syrups.
The resulting hydrogenated starch hydrolysates are mixtures of
monomeric, dimeric, and polymeric saccharides. The ratios of these
different saccharides give different hydrogenated starch
hydrolysates different properties. Mixtures of hydrogenated starch
hydrolysates, such as LYCASIN.RTM., a commercially available
product manufactured by Roquette Freres of France, and HYSTAR.RTM.,
a commercially available product manufactured by SPI Polyols, Inc.
of New Castle, Del., are also useful.
[0179] The sweetening agents which may be included in the
compositions of some embodiments may be any of a variety of
sweeteners known in the art. These are described in more detail in
the "Additional Components" section herein below and may be used in
many distinct physical forms well-known in the art to provide an
initial burst of sweetness and/or a prolonged sensation of
sweetness. Without being limited thereto, such physical forms
include free forms, such as spray dried, powdered, beaded forms,
encapsulated forms, and mixtures thereof.
[0180] Desirably, the sweetener is a high intensity sweetener such
as aspartame, neotame, sucralose, and acesulfame potassium
(Ace-K).
[0181] In general, an effective amount of sweetener may be utilized
to provide the level of sweetness desired, and this amount may vary
with the sweetener selected. In some embodiments the amount of
sweetener may be present in amounts from about 0.001% to about 3%,
by weight of the gum composition, depending upon the sweetener or
combination of sweeteners used. The exact range of amounts for each
type of sweetener may be selected by those skilled in the art.
[0182] In some embodiments, particularly liquid-fill embodiments,
the gum region may include a specific polyol composition including
at least one polyol which is from about 30% to about 80% by weight
of said gum region, and specifically from 50% to about 60%. In some
liquid-fill embodiments, such gum region compositions may
substantially reduce or prevent leaking of the liquid center. The
polyol composition may include any polyol known in the art
including, but not limited to maltitol, sorbitol, erythritol,
xylitol, mannitol, isomalt, lactitol and combinations thereof.
Lycasin.TM. which is a hydrogenated starch hydrolysate including
sorbitol and maltitol, may also be used.
[0183] The amount of the polyol composition or combination of
polyols used in the gum region will depend on many factors
including the type of elastomers used in the gum base and the
particular polyols used. For example, wherein the total amount of
the polyol composition is in the range of about 40% to about 65%
based on the weight of the gum region, the amount of maltitol may
be from about 40% to about 60% in addition to an amount of sorbitol
from about 0 up to about 10%, more specifically, an amount of
maltitol may be from about 45% to about 55% in combination with
sorbitol from about 5% to about 10% based on the weight of the gum
region.
[0184] Maltitol is a sweet, water-soluble sugar alcohol useful as a
bulking agent in the preparation of beverages and foodstuffs and is
more fully described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,708,396, which disclosure
is incorporated herein by reference. Maltitol is made by
hydrogenation of maltose which is the most common reducing
disaccharide and is found in starch and other natural products.
[0185] The polyol composition which may include one or more
different polyols which may be derived from a genetically modified
organism ("GMO") or GMO free source. For example, the maltitol may
be GMO free maltitol or provided by a hydrogenated starch
hydrolysate. For the purposes of this invention, the term
"GMO-free" refers to a composition that has been derived from
process in which genetically modified organisms are not
utilized.
[0186] Some embodiments may include a polyol composition including
maltitol which has a greater crystalline density than sorbitol.
Other polyols which exhibit a greater crystalline density than
sorbitol include xylitol and mannitol. The greater the crystalline
density of the polyol the better the barrier properties are.
Specifically, a polyol of a greater crystalline density results in
a structure with fewer pores, which provides less surface area for
potential moisture or fluid migration into the gum region from the
liquid-fill.
[0187] Since sugar (sucrose) is generally accepted as the baseline
for sweetness intensity comparison of sweeteners, including
polyols, the polyol composition of some embodiments is described
similarly. For example, the polyol composition of may have a
sweetness of greater than about 50% of the sweetness of sucrose.
More specifically, the polyol composition of the present invention
may have sweetness greater than about 70% the sweetness of
sucrose.
[0188] The polyol composition of some embodiments may also be
described in terms of the solubility of the composition. The
solubility of the polyol composition will depend on the solubility
of the one or more polyols included in the composition. For
example, if maltitol is the only polyol included in the polyol
composition, the solubility of the polyol composition in water will
be about 60% at 25.degree. C.
[0189] Blends of different polyols may also be used in some
embodiments. Examples of useful polyols are erythritol, lactitol,
xylitol, mannitol, maltitol, sorbitol, isomalt, and combinations
thereof. Where a blend of more than one polyol is used, the
solubility of the polyol composition will depend on a weighted
ratio of the amount of the polyol in the blend and the solubility
of each individual polyol which is included. For example, a
combination of two or more polyols may have a water solubility
range of about 60% to about 72%, if it includes maltitol, which has
a water solubility of 60% at 25.degree. C., and sorbitol, which has
a water solubility of about 72% at 25.degree. C. Other suitable
solubility ranges, which depend on the included two or more polyols
include the ranges from about 40% to about 60% at 25.degree. C. and
55% to 65% at 25.degree. C. The range of the solubility may vary,
depending on the particular polyols used. Alternative suitable
solubilities of a polyol combination include those having a
solubility less than sucrose (i.e., less than 67%).
[0190] In some embodiments, the polyol composition may include
particles of a variety of sizes. Specifically, the average particle
size of the polyol composition ranges from about 30 microns to
about 600 microns, more specifically from about 30 microns to about
200 microns.
[0191] Coloring agents may be used in amounts effective to produce
the desired color. The coloring agents may include pigments which
may be incorporated in amounts up to about 6%, by weight of the gum
composition. For example, titanium dioxide may be incorporated in
amounts up to about 2%, and preferably less than about 1%, by
weight of the gum composition. The colorants may also include
natural food colors and dyes suitable for food, drug and cosmetic
applications. These colorants are known as F.D.& C. dyes and
lakes. The materials acceptable for the foregoing uses are
preferably water-soluble. Illustrative nonlimiting examples include
the indigoid dye known as F.D.& C. Blue No. 2, which is the
disodium salt of 5,5-indigotindisulfonic acid. Similarly, the dye
known as F.D.& C. Green No. 1 comprises a triphenylmethane dye
and is the monosodium salt of
4-[4-(N-ethyl-p-sulfoniumbenzylamino)diphenylmethylene]-[1-(N-ethyl-N-p-s-
ulfoniumbenzyl)-delta-2,5-cyclohexadieneimine]. A full recitation
of all F.D.& C. colorants and their corresponding chemical
structures may be found in the Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical
Technology, 3rd Edition, in volume 5 at pages 857-884, which text
is incorporated herein by reference. Additional coloring components
are described in the "Additional Components" section
hereinbelow.
[0192] Suitable oils and fats usable in gum compositions include
partially hydrogenated vegetable or animal fats, such as coconut
oil, palm kernel oil, beef tallow, and lard, among others. These
ingredients when used are generally present in amounts up to about
7%, and preferably up to about 3.5%, by weight of the gum
composition.
[0193] Some embodiments may include a method for preparing the
improved chewing gum compositions for the gum region, including
both chewing gum and bubble gum compositions. The chewing gum
compositions may be prepared using standard techniques and
equipment known to those skilled in the art. The apparatus useful
in accordance with some embodiments comprises mixing and heating
apparatus well known in the chewing gum manufacturing arts, and
therefore the selection of the specific apparatus will be apparent
to the artisan.
[0194] With respect to the center-fill layer, the gum region may
have a water activity greater than or equal to the water activity
of the center-fill composition. However, in compositions wherein a
greater water activity is desired in the center or liquid-fill, the
water activity of the center-fill composition may be greater than
that of the gum region. A higher moisture content will aid in
hydration of thickeners like xanthan gum and cellulose when present
in the center-fill.
[0195] The gum region may have a total moisture content of about
14% by weight of the gum region and more specifically may have a
total moisture content from about 9% to about 14% by weight, with a
free moisture content of less than about 5%. The center-fill
further may have total moisture content including free and bound
moisture from about zero up to about 35% by weight of said
center-fill, specifically about 22%.
Center-Fill Composition
[0196] The center-fill, also referred to as the interior portion,
of the chewing gum composition can take the physical form of a
solid, a liquid, a semi-solid or a gas. Depending on the physical
form of the center, adjustments can be made to the adjacent portion
of the chewing gum composition that will be in contact with the
interior portion.
[0197] In some embodiments, liquid centers may present viscosity
differences that can be manipulated for a desired effect. In some
embodiments, liquid centers can be formulated to have low
viscosities that consumers perceive as refreshing.
[0198] In some embodiments, solid centers may be particulate or
unitary. In embodiments where the solid center is particulate, the
center can include a plurality of particles. In some particulate
solid center-fill embodiments, variables such as particle size and
particle size distribution can be manipulated for a desired effect.
In some embodiments, small particles with narrow particle size
distribution can be included in the center to provide rapid
dissolution when contacted with saliva.
[0199] In embodiments where the solid center is unitary, the center
can include a cohesive mass where distinct particles are not
discernible. In some unitary solid center embodiments, the texture
can be manipulated for a desired effect. In some embodiments, a
unitary solid center can comprise a confectionery format such as
nougat to provide a chewy texture experience.
[0200] In some embodiments, gaseous centers can form a void in the
chewing gum composition that alters the chewing gum composition's
texture profile by collapsing upon chewing. In some embodiments,
the gaseous center can include a trapped gas such as nitrogen while
in other embodiments, the gaseous center can include a mixed gas
composition such as air. In some embodiments, the gas can be
included in the center as part of a matrix such as a foam or glassy
matrix.
[0201] Additionally in some embodiments, the physical form of the
center region can change. In some embodiments, the center can be
solid when manufactured and then become liquid over time. In some
embodiments, the initially solid center portion can be a
substrate-enzyme blend where the enzyme acts upon the substrate to
liquefy the solid. In other embodiments, the initial center solid
portion can be a solid at a manufacturing temperature that is lower
than the storage temperature such that the center liquefies as the
temperature reaches the storage temperature. In some embodiments,
the center is a liquid-filled particle that remains solid until
ruptured or disrupted when it releases liquid. In some embodiments,
the initially solid center portion can interact with an adjacent
region configured to contain free moisture such that the center
portion pulls moisture from the adjacent region and becomes
liquid.
Solid Center-Fill Compositions
[0202] In some embodiments, the solid center can include
particulates. Particulates can include, but are not limited to
nuts; seeds; cocoa beans; coffee beans; milk powders;
fruit-containing particles such as restructured fruit as described
in U.S. Pat. No. 6,027,758; freeze dried fruit; freeze dried
vegetables; fat particles; cocoa powder; sucrose; starch; polyols
such as xylitol, erythritol, sorbitol, mannitol, lactitol,
maltitol, isomalt, hydrogenated starch hydrolysates; waxes; and
combinations thereof.
[0203] In some embodiments, the solid center can include particles
onto which other materials have been complexed. In some
embodiments, the solid particle can include an absorbent material
to which a second material is absorbed. In some embodiments, the
solid particle can include an adsorbent material to which a second
material is adsorbed. In some embodiments, the solid particle can
include a complexation material to which a second material is
complexed. In some embodiments, silica particles can absorb at
least a second material to form a particulate solid interior
portion. In some embodiments, cyclodextrin particles can complex
with at least a second material to form a particulate solid
interior portion.
[0204] In some embodiments where the solid center can change to a
liquid, the solid center can include a mixture of invertase and
sucrose such invertase operates on sucrose to form liquid invert
sugar resulting in a liquid interior portion over time. In some
embodiments, the center can be a fat with melting characteristics
such that at manufacturing temperatures the fat is solid and then
melts to become liquid at storage temperatures. In some
embodiments, the solid center can include liquid-filled gelatin or
sucrose beads that release liquid when ruptured or disrupted.
[0205] In some embodiments, the solid center can include a unitary
or particulate solid confectionery composition. Such confectionery
compositions can include, but are not limited to, chocolate,
compound coating, carob coating, cocoa butter, butter fat,
hydrogenated vegetable fat, illipe butter, fondant including
fondant-based cremes, fudge, frappe, caramel, nougat, compressed
tablet, candy floss (also known as cotton candy), marzipan, hard
boiled candy, gummy candy, jelly beans, toffees, jellies including
pectin-based gels, jams, preserves, butterscotch, nut brittles or
croquant, candied fruit, marshmallow, pastilles, pralines or
nougats, flour or starch confectionery, truffles, nonpareils, bon
bons, after-dinner mints, fourres, nut pastes, peanut butter,
chewing gum, kisses, angel kisses, montelimart, nougatine, fruit
chews, Turkish delight, hard gums, soft gums, starch jellies,
gelatin jellies, agar jellies, persipan, coconut paste, coconut
ice, lozenges, cachous, creme paste, dragees, sugared nuts, sugared
almonds, comfits, aniseed balls, licorice, licorice paste,
chocolate spreads, chocolate crumb, truffles, gasified candy and
combinations thereof.
Liquid Center-Fill Compositions
[0206] In some embodiments, the liquid center can be aqueous while
in other embodiments the liquid center can be non-aqueous. In some
embodiments, the liquid center can be a solution while in other
embodiments, the center can be a suspension while in still other
embodiments, the center can be an emulsion.
[0207] In some embodiments, the viscosity of the liquid center can
be manipulated for a variety of reasons including, but not limited
to, processing efficiency or creation of a desired perception. In
some embodiments, the viscosity of the liquid center can be 3,000
to 10,000 pascal seconds. In some embodiments, the viscosity of the
liquid center can be 4,000 to 6,5000 pascal seconds.
[0208] In some embodiments, the water activity of the liquid center
can be manipulated for a variety of reasons including, but not
limited to, microbial stability or maintenance of a desired
texture. In some embodiments, the water activity of the liquid
center can be 0.1 to 0.7. In some embodiments, the water activity
of the liquid center can be 0.25 to 0.35.
[0209] Liquids that can be included in the liquid center can
include, but are not limited to, fruit juice; vegetable juice;
fruit puree; fruit pulp; vegetable pulp; vegetable puree; fruit
sauce; vegetable sauce; honey; maple syrup; molasses; corn syrup;
sugar syrup; polyol syrup; hydrogenated starch hydrolysates syrup;
emulsions; vegetable oil; glycerin; propylene glycol; ethanol;
liqueurs; chocolate syrup, dairy-based liquids such as milk, cream,
etc.; and combinations thereof.
Gaseous Center-Fill Compositions
[0210] In some embodiments, a gaseous center can be formed by
creating a hollow center. The gas can include a mixed composition
gas such as air or it can include a single gas such as nitrogen,
carbon dioxide, or oxygen. In some embodiments, a gaseous center
will include gas trapped in a matrix such as a glassy matrix or
foam. In some embodiments where gas can be trapped in a glassy
matrix, the glass can be sucrose and the gas can be carbon dioxide.
In some embodiments where gas can be introduced into the center in
a foam, the foam can include milk proteins and the gas can include
a mixed composition gas such as air.
[0211] Any of the center-fill compositions discussed above may
include any components known in the art for incorporation with a
center-fill composition. In some embodiments, particularly
liquid-fill embodiments, for instance, this may include glycerine
in addition to one or more other polyols in amounts greater than
zero up to about 20%, more specifically, up to about 10% by weight
of the total chewing gum composition, i.e., including a center-fill
composition, a gum region and a coating. In some embodiments, the
center-fill is approximately 8% by weight of the total chewing gum
composition. In some embodiments, the other polyol component
includes desirably maltitol, sorbitol, xylitol, or a combination
thereof.
[0212] In some embodiments, the centers may contain those
traditional ingredients well known in the chewing gum and
confectionery arts, such as flavoring agents, sweetening agents,
and the like, and mixtures thereof, as described above. In addition
to confectionery additives, the centers may also contain
pharmaceutical additives such as medicaments, breath fresheners,
vitamins, minerals, caffeine, fruit juices, and the like, and
mixtures thereof. The confectionery and pharmaceutical agents may
be used in many distinct physical forms well known in the art to
provide an initial burst of sweetness and flavor and/or therapeutic
activity or a prolonged sensation of sweetness and flavor and/or
therapeutic activity. Without being limited thereto, such physical
forms include free forms, such as spray dried, powdered, and beaded
forms, and encapsulated forms, and mixtures thereof. Illustrative,
but not limiting, examples of liquid centers suitable for use in
some embodiments include those centers disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos.
3,894,154, 4,156,740, 4,157,402, 4,316,915, and 4,466,983, which
disclosures are incorporated herein by reference. Specific examples
of suitable additional components include taurine, guarana,
vitamins, Actizol.TM., chlorophyll, Recaldent.TM. tooth
remineralization technology, and Retsyn.TM. breath freshening
technology.
[0213] In some embodiments, particularly liquid-fill embodiments,
the center-fill composition also may include a natural or synthetic
gum such as carboxymethylcellulose, pectin, propylene glycol
aginate, agar and gum tragacanth. These compositions serve to
increase viscosity by reducing the amount of free water in the
composition. The viscosity of the center-fill may range from about
300 cp to about 6,000 cp at 25.degree. C. In liquid-fill
compositions which have a greater water activity than the
surrounding gum region, the viscosity may range from about 3,000 cp
to about 6,000 cp at 25.degree. C.
[0214] Xanthan gum may also be used to increase the viscosity of
the center-fill composition. In some liquid-fill embodiments,
increasing viscosity of the liquid also helps prevent the liquid
from leaking through the gum piece. Xanthan gum is available under
the tradename Keltrol.RTM. from CP Kelco of Altanta, Ga.
[0215] Some embodiments extend to methods of making the improved
center-filled chewing gum compositions. The improved compositions
may be prepared using standard techniques and equipment known to
those skilled in the art. The apparatus useful in accordance with
the embodiments described herein comprises mixing and heating
apparatus well known in the chewing gum manufacturing arts, and
therefore the selection of the specific apparatus will be apparent
to the artisan. Such methods and apparatus are disclosed, for
example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,806,290 and 3,857,963, which
disclosures are incorporated herein by reference.
Coating Composition
[0216] The coating composition, when included in the center-fill
compositions, may be applied by any method known in the art
including the method described above. The coating composition may
be present in an amount from about 2% to about 80%, more
specifically from about 25% to about 35% by weight of the total
center-filled gum piece, even more specifically about 30% by weight
of the gum piece.
[0217] The outer coating may be hard, crunchy or soft. Typically,
the outer coating may include sorbitol, maltitol, xylitol,
erythritol, isomalt, and other crystallizable polyols; sucrose may
also be used. Furthermore the coating may include several opaque
layers, such that the chewing gum composition is not visible
through the coating itself, which can optionally be covered with a
further one or more transparent layers for aesthetic, textural and
protective purposes. The outer coating may also contain small
amounts of water and gum arabic. The coating can be further coated
with wax. The coating may be applied in a conventional manner by
successive applications of a coating solution, with drying in
between each coat. As the coating dries it usually becomes opaque
and is usually white, though other colorants may be added. A polyol
coating can be further coated with wax. The coating can further
include colored flakes or speckles. If the composition comprises a
coating, it is possible that one or more oral care actives can be
dispersed throughout the coating. This is especially preferred if
one or more oral care actives is incompatible in a single phase
composition with another of the actives. Flavors may also be added
to yield unique product characteristics.
[0218] In some embodiments, the coating may also be formulated to
assist with increasing the thermal stability of the gum piece and
preventing leaking of the liquid fill. In some embodiments, the
coating may include a gelatin composition. The gelatin composition
may be added as a 40% by weight solution and may be present in the
coating composition from about 5% to about 10% by weight of the
coating composition, and more specifically about 7% to about 8%.
The gel strength of the gelatin may be from about 130 bloom to
about 250 bloom.
[0219] Other materials may be added to the coating to achieve
desired properties. These materials may include without limitation,
cellulosics such as carboxymethyl cellulose, gelatin, pullulan,
alginate, starch, carrageenan, xanthan gum, gum arabic and
polyvinyl acetate (PVA).
[0220] The coating composition may also include a pre-coating which
is added to the individual gum pieces prior to an optional hard
coating. The pre-coating may include an application of polyvinyl
acetate (PVA). This may be applied as a solution of PVA in a
solvent, such as ethyl alcohol. When an outer hard coating is
desired, the PVA application may be approximately 3% to 4% by
weight of the total coating or about 1% of the total weight of the
gum piece (including a center-fill, gum region and hard
coating).
[0221] Various other coating compositions and methods of making are
also contemplated including but not limited to soft panning, dual
or multiple extrusion, lamination, etc. Thus, in some embodiments,
the coating can be amorphous or crystalline and the resulting
texture can be hard, crunchy, crispy, soft or chewy.
Additional Components
[0222] In addition to the components added to create the duality,
or multi-modality, a variety of optional additives also may be
included in some embodiments. The optional additives include
components, such as flavors, sensates, tastants and functional
agents, as set forth above, as well as other optional ingredients.
In some embodiments, it may be desirable to include other
components in the chewing gum composition, in addition to the
components that participate in the duality, or multi-modality. For
example, in embodiments in which the duality is among
functionalities, it may be desirable to add a flavor to one or more
regions of the chewing gum composition to provide a flavored
chewing gum product. Such additives include, for example,
physiological cooling agents, throat-soothing agents, spices,
warming agents, tooth-whitening agents, breath-freshening agents,
vitamins minerals, caffeine, drugs and other actives, which may be
included in any or all portions or regions of the chewing gum
composition. Such components may be used in amounts sufficient to
achieve their intended effects.
[0223] Any of the optional components discussed herein may be added
to any region of the center-fill chewing gum composition in their
modified release form and/or without modified release (sometimes
referred to as "free" components). In some embodiments, for
instance, a single component may be added to the center-fill
chewing gum in its modified release form and free form. The
modified release component and free component may be included
together in the same region of the center-fill chewing gum or, in
some embodiments, the two components may be included in different
regions of the gum.
[0224] Types of individual ingredients for which optional managed
release from a chewing gum composition may be desired, include, but
are not limited to sweeteners, flavors, actives, effervescing
ingredients, appetite suppressors, breath fresheners, dental care
ingredients, emulsifiers, flavor potentiators, bitterness masking
or blocking ingredients, food acids, micronutrients, sensates,
mouth moistening ingredients, throat care ingredients, colors, and
combinations thereof. Ingredients may be available in different
forms such as, for example, liquid form, spray-dried form, or
crystalline form. In some embodiments, a delivery system or chewing
gum composition may include the same type of ingredient in
different forms. For example, a chewing gum composition may include
a liquid flavor and a spray-dried version of the same flavor. In
some embodiments, the ingredient may be in its free or encapsulated
form and may be present in any region of the gum composition such
as in the center-fill, the gum region, or the coating.
[0225] In some embodiments, an ingredient's release is modified
such that when a consumer chews the chewing gum, they may
experience an increase in the duration of flavor or sweetness
perception and/or the ingredient is released or otherwise made
available over a longer period of time. Modified release may be
accomplished by any method known in the art, such as by
encapsulation. Where modified release is due to encapsulation, this
may be accomplished by a variety of means such as by spray coating
or extrusion.
[0226] Additionally, if early and extended release of the
ingredient is desired, the chewing gum composition may include
ingredients without modified release (sometimes referred to as
"free" ingredients), as well as ingredients with modified release.
In some embodiments, a free ingredient may be used to deliver an
initial amount or "hit" of an ingredient (e.g., flavor, cooling
agent) or an initial sensation or benefit caused by the ingredient
(e.g., flavor, nasal action, cooling, warming, tingling, saliva
generation, breath freshening, teeth whitening, throat soothing,
mouth moistening, etc.). In some embodiments, the same ingredient
can be provided with modified release characteristics to provide an
additional or delayed amount of the same sensation or benefit. By
using both the free ingredient and the ingredient with modified
release characteristics, the sensation or benefit due to the
ingredient may be provided over a longer period of time and/or
perception of the sensation or benefit by a consumer may be
improved. Also, in some embodiments the initial amount or "hit" of
the ingredient may predispose or precondition the consumers' mouth
or perception of the chewing gum composition.
[0227] As another example, in some embodiments it may be desirable
to provide a sustained release of an ingredient in a chewing gum
composition over time. To accomplish sustained release, the
ingredient may be modified to allow for a lower concentration of
the ingredient to be released over a longer period of time versus
the release of a higher concentration of the ingredient over a
shorter period of time. A sustained release of an ingredient may be
advantageous in situations when the ingredient has a bitter or
other bad taste at the higher concentrations. A sustained release
of an ingredient also may be advantageous when release of the
ingredient in higher concentrations over a shorter period of time
may result in a lesser amount of the ingredient being optimally
delivered to the consumer. For example, for a tooth whitening or
breath freshening ingredient, providing too much of the ingredient
too fast may result in a consumer swallowing a significant portion
of the ingredient before the ingredient has had a chance to
interact with the consumer's teeth, mucous membranes, and/or dental
work, thereby wasting the ingredient or at least reducing the
benefit of having the ingredient in the chewing gum
composition.
Ingredient Release Management
[0228] In different embodiments, different techniques, ingredients,
and/or delivery systems, may be used to manage release of one or
more ingredients in a chewing gum composition. In some embodiments,
more than one of the techniques, ingredients, and/or delivery
systems may be used.
[0229] In some embodiments, the delay in availability or other
release of an ingredient in a chewing gum composition caused by
encapsulation of the ingredient may be based, in whole or in part,
by one or more of the following: the type of encapsulating
material, the molecular weight of the encapsulating material, the
tensile strength of the delivery system containing the ingredient,
the hydrophobicity of the encapsulating material, the presence of
other materials in the chewing gum composition (e.g., tensile
strength modifying agents, emulsifiers), the ratio of the amounts
of one or more ingredients in the delivery system to the amount of
the encapsulating material in the delivery system, the number of
layers of encapsulating material, the desired texture, flavor,
shelf life, or other characteristic of chewing gum composition, the
ratio of the encapsulating material to the ingredient being
encapsulated, etc. Thus, by changing or managing one or more of
these characteristics of a delivery system or the chewing gum
composition, release of one or more ingredients in a chewing gum
composition during consumption of the chewing gum composition can
be managed more effectively and/or a more desirable release profile
for one or more ingredients in the delivery system or the gum
composition may be obtained. This may lead to a more positive
sensory or consumer experience during consumption of the chewing
gum composition, more effective release of such one or more
ingredients during consumption of the chewing gum composition, less
need for the ingredient (e.g., more effective release of the
ingredient may allow the amount of the ingredient in the chewing
gum composition to be reduced), increased delivery of a therapeutic
or other functional benefit to the consumer, etc. Additionally, in
some embodiments, managing the release rate or profile can be
tailored to specific consumer segments.
Encapsulation
[0230] In some embodiments, one or more ingredients may be
encapsulated with an encapsulating material to modify the release
profile of the ingredient. In general, partially or completely
encapsulating an ingredient used in a chewing gum composition with
an encapsulating material may delay release of the ingredient
during consumption of the chewing gum composition, thereby delaying
when the ingredient becomes available inside the consumer's mouth,
throat, and/or stomach, available to react or mix with another
ingredient, and/or available to provide some sensory experience
and/or functional or therapeutic benefit. This can be particularly
true when the ingredient is water soluble or at least partially
water soluble.
[0231] In some embodiments, encapsulation may be employed to
provide barrier protection to or from a component rather than to
modify the release of the component. For instance, it often is
desirable to limit the exposure of acids to other components in a
chewing gum composition. Such acids may be encapsulated to limit
their exposure to other components, or alternatively, the other
components in the chewing gum composition may be encapsulated to
limit their exposure to the acid.
[0232] In some embodiments, a material used to encapsulate an
ingredient may include water insoluble polymers, co-polymers, or
other materials capable of forming a strong matrix, solid coating,
or film as a protective barrier with or for the ingredient. In some
embodiments, the encapsulating material may completely surround,
coat, cover, or enclose an ingredient. In other embodiments, the
encapsulating material may only partially surround, coat, cover, or
enclose an ingredient. Different encapsulating materials may
provide different release rates or release profiles for the
encapsulated ingredient. In some embodiments, encapsulating
material used in a delivery system may include one or more of the
following: polyvinyl acetate, polyethylene, crosslinked polyvinyl
pyrrolidone, polymethylmethacrylate, polylactidacid,
polyhydroxyalkanoates, ethylcellulose, polyvinyl acetatephthalate,
polyethylene glycol esters, methacrylicacid-co-methylmethacrylate,
ethylene-vinylacetate (EVA) copolymer, and the like, and
combinations thereof.
[0233] In some embodiments, an ingredient may be pre-treated prior
to encapsulation with an encapsulating material. For example, an
ingredient may be coated with a "coating material" that is not
miscible with the ingredient or is at least less miscible with the
ingredient relative to the ingredient's miscibility with the
encapsulating material.
[0234] In some embodiments, an encapsulation material may be used
to individually encapsulate different ingredients in the same
chewing gum composition. For example, a delivery system may include
aspartame encapsulated by polyvinyl acetate. Another delivery
system may include ace-k encapsulated by polyvinyl acetate. Both
delivery systems may be used as ingredients in the same chewing gum
or in other chewing gum compositions. For additional examples, see
U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 60/683,634 entitled "Methods and
Delivery Systems for Managing Release of One or More Ingredients in
an Edible Composition" and filed May 23, 2005, the entire contents
of which are incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
[0235] In some embodiments, different encapsulation materials may
be used to individually encapsulate different ingredients used in
the same chewing gum composition. For example, a delivery system
may include aspartame encapsulated by polyvinyl acetate. Another
delivery system may include ace-k encapsulated by EVA. Both
delivery systems may be used as ingredients in the same chewing gum
or other chewing gum compositions. Examples of encapsulated
ingredients using different encapsulating materials can be found in
U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 60/655,894 filed Feb. 25, 2005,
and entitled "Process for Manufacturing a Delivery System for
Active Components as Part of an Edible Composition," the entire
contents of which are incorporated herein by reference for all
purposes.
Methods of Encapsulation
[0236] There are many ways to encapsulate one or more ingredients
with an encapsulating material. For example, in some embodiments, a
sigma blade or Banbury.TM. type mixer may be used. In other
embodiments, an extruder or other type of continuous mixer may be
used. In some embodiments, spray coating, spray chilling,
absorption, adsorption, inclusion complexing (e.g., creating a
flavor/cyclodextrin complex), coacervation, fluidized bed coating,
or other process may be used to encapsulate an ingredient with an
encapsulating material.
[0237] Examples of encapsulation of ingredients can be found in
U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 60/655,894, filed Feb. 25, 2005,
and entitled "Process for Manufacturing a Delivery System for
Active Components as Part of an Edible Composition," the entire
contents of which are incorporated herein by reference for all
purposes. Other examples of encapsulation of ingredients can be
found in U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 10/955,255 filed Sep. 30,
2004, and entitled "Encapsulated Compositions and Methods of
Preparation," the entire contents of which are incorporated herein
by reference for all purposes. Further examples of encapsulation of
ingredients can be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
10/955,149 filed Sep. 30, 2004, and entitled "Thermally Stable High
Tensile Strength Encapsulation Compositions for Actives," the
entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference for
all purposes. Still further examples of encapsulation of
ingredients can be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
11/052,672 filed Feb. 7, 2005, and entitled "Stable Tooth Whitening
Gum with Reactive Components," the entire contents of which are
incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. Further
encapsulation techniques and resulting delivery systems may be
found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,770,308, 6,759,066, 6,692,778, 6,592,912,
6,586,023, 6,555,145, 6,479,071, 6,472,000, 6,444,241, 6,365,209,
6,174,514, 5,693,334, 4,711,784, 4,816,265, and 4,384,004, the
contents of all of which are incorporated herein by reference for
all purposes.
[0238] In some embodiments, a delivery system may be ground to a
powdered material with a particular size for use as an ingredient
in a chewing gum composition. For example, in some embodiments, an
ingredient may be ground to approximately the same particle size of
the other chewing gum ingredients so as to create a homogeneous
mixture. In some embodiments, the delivery system may be ground to
a powdered material with an average particle size such as, for
example, about 4 to about 100 mesh or about 8 to about 25 mesh or
about 12 to about 20 mesh.
Tensile Strength
[0239] In some embodiments, selection of an encapsulating material
for one or more ingredients may be based on tensile strength
desired for the resulting delivery system. For example, in some
embodiments, a delivery system produces delayed or otherwise
controlled release of an ingredient through the use of a
pre-selected or otherwise desired tensile strength.
[0240] In some embodiments, increasing the tensile strength of a
delivery system may increase the delayed or extended release of an
ingredient in the delivery system. The tensile strength for a
delivery system may be matched with a desirable release rate
selected according to the type of the ingredient(s) to be
encapsulated for the delivery system, the encapsulating material
used, any other additives incorporated in the delivery system
and/or a chewing gum composition using the delivery system as an
ingredient, the desired rate of release of the ingredient, and the
like. In some embodiments, the tensile strength of a delivery
system which can be at least 6,500 psi, including 7500, 10,000,
20,000, 30,000, 40,000, 50,000, 60,000, 70,000, 80,000, 90,000,
100,000, 125,000, 135,000, 150,000, 165,000, 175,000, 180,000,
195,000, 200,000 and all ranges and subranges there between, for
example, a tensile strength range of 6,500 to 200,000 psi.
[0241] In some embodiments, a delivery system for one or more
ingredients can be provided based on the tensile strength of the
delivery system having a specific tensile strength when compared to
a standard. Thus, the design of the delivery system is not focused
on one characteristic (e.g., molecular weight) of one of the
materials (e.g., encapsulating material) used to produce the
delivery system. In this manner, a delivery system can be
formulated to express a desired release profile by adjusting and
modifying the tensile strength through the specific selection of
the ingredient(s), encapsulating material, additives, amount of the
ingredient(s), amount of encapsulating material, relative amounts
of ingredient(s) to encapsulating material, etc. If a desired
tensile strength is chosen for a delivery system, any delivery
system that has the desired tensile strength may be used without
being limited to a particular encapsulating material and its
molecular weight. The formulation process can be extended to
encapsulating materials that exhibit similar physical and chemical
properties as the encapsulating material forming part of the
standard delivery system.
[0242] In some embodiments, a delivery system for delivering an
ingredient may be formulated to ensure an effective sustained
release of the ingredient based on the type and amount of the
ingredient and the desired release rate for the ingredient. For
example, it may be desirable to affect the controlled release of a
high intensity sweetener from a chewing gum over a period of
twenty-five to thirty minutes to ensure against a rapid burst of
sweetness that may be offensive to some consumers. A shorter
controlled release time may be desirable for other type of
ingredients such as pharmaceuticals or therapeutic agents, which
may be incorporated into the same chewing gum composition by using
separate delivery systems for each of these ingredients. Delivery
systems may be formulated with a particular tensile strength
associated with a range of release rates based on a standard. The
standard may comprise a series of known delivery systems having
tensile strengths over a range extending, for example, from low to
high tensile strength values. Each of the delivery systems of the
standard will be associated with a particular release rate or
ranges of release rates. Thus, for example, a delivery system can
be formulated with a relatively slow release rate by a fabricating
a delivering system having a relatively high tensile strength.
Conversely, lower tensile strength compositions tend to exhibit
relatively faster release rates.
[0243] In some embodiments, encapsulating material in a delivery
system may be present in amounts of from about 0.2% to 10% by
weight based on the total weight of the chewing gum composition,
including 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 0.9, 1.0, 1.25, 1.4, 1.7, 1.9, 2.2, 2.45,
2.75, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.25, 4.8, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 7.0, 7.25,
7.75, 8.0, 8.3, 8.7, 9.0, 9.25, 9.5, 9.8 and all values and ranges
there between, for example, from 1% to 5% by weight. The amount of
the encapsulating material can depend in part on the amount of the
ingredient(s) component that is encapsulated. The amount of the
encapsulating material with respect to the weight of the delivery
system, is from about 30% to 99%, including 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,
65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 95, 97 and all values and ranges there between,
for example, from about 60% to 90% by weight.
[0244] In some embodiments, the tensile strength of a delivery
system may be selected from relatively high tensile strengths when
a relatively slow rate of release for an ingredient in the delivery
system is desired and relatively lower tensile strengths when a
faster rate of release for an ingredient in the delivery system is
desired. Thus, when employing a tensile strength of 50,000 psi for
a delivery system, the release rate of the ingredient, will
generally be lower than the release rate of the ingredient in a
delivery system having a tensile strength of 10,000 psi regardless
of the type of encapsulating material (e.g., polyvinyl acetate)
chosen.
[0245] In some embodiments, the encapsulating material for a
delivery system is polyvinyl acetate. A representative example of a
polyvinyl acetate product suitable for use as an encapsulating
material in the present invention is Vinnapas.RTM. B100 sold by
Wacker Polymer Systems of Adrian, Mich. A delivery system utilizing
polyvinyl acetate may be prepared by melting a sufficient amount of
polyvinyl acetate at a temperature of about 65.degree. C. to
120.degree. C. for a short period of time, e.g., five minutes. The
melt temperature will depend on the type and tensile strength of
the polyvinyl acetate encapsulating material where higher tensile
strength materials will generally melt at higher temperatures. Once
the encapsulating material is melted, a suitable amount of an
ingredient (e.g., high intensity sweetener such as aspartame) is
added and blended into the molten mass thoroughly for an additional
short period of mixing. The resulting mixture is a semi-solid mass,
which is then cooled (e.g., at 0.degree. C.) to obtain a solid, and
then ground to a U.S. Standard sieve size of from about 30 to 200
(600 to 75 microns). The tensile strength of the resulting delivery
system can readily be tested according to ASTM-D638.
[0246] For additional information regarding how tensile strength of
a delivery system may be used to create managed release of one or
more ingredients, see U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/083,968
entitled "A Delivery System for Active Components as Part of an
Edible Composition Having Preselected Tensile Strength" and filed
on Mar. 21, 2005, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/719,298
entitled "A Delivery System for Active Components as Part of an
Edible Composition" and filed Nov. 21, 2003, the complete contents
of both of which are incorporated herein by reference for all
purposes.
Hydrophobicity
[0247] In some embodiments, the release of one or more ingredients
from a delivery system may depend on more than tensile strength.
For example, the release of the ingredients may be directly related
to the tensile strength of the delivery system and the
hydrophobicity (i.e., water resistance) of the encapsulating
polymer or other material.
[0248] As a more specific example, when a delivery system is used
in a chewing gum, moisture may be absorbed in the encapsulated
ingredient(s) during mastication and chewing of the chewing gum.
This may result in softening of the encapsulating material and
releasing of the ingredient(s) during the mastication and chewing
of the chewing gum. The softening of the encapsulation material
depends on the hydrophobicity of the polymer used as the
encapsulation material. In general, the higher the hydrophobicity
of the polymer, the longer mastication time is needed for softening
the polymer.
[0249] As one example, higher hydrophobic polymers such as
ethylene-vinylacetate (EVA) copolymer can be used to increase or
otherwise manage ingredient (e.g., sweetener) release times from
encapsulations. The degree of hydrophobicity can be controlled by
adjusting the ratio of ethylene and vinylacetate in the copolymer.
In general, the higher the ethylene to vinylacetate ratio, the
longer time it will take during consumption to soften the
encapsulation particles, and the slower or more delayed will be the
release rate of the ingredient. The lower the ethylene to
vinylacetate ratio, the shorter time it will take during
consumption to soften the encapsulation particles, and the faster
or earlier will be the release rate of the ingredient.
[0250] As illustrated by the discussion above, in some embodiments,
release of an ingredient from a delivery system can be managed or
otherwise controlled by formulating the delivery system based on
the hydrophobicity of the encapsulating material, e.g., the
polymer, for the ingredient. Using highly hydrophobic polymers, the
release times of the ingredient can be increased or delayed. In a
similar manner, using encapsulating material that is less
hydrophobic, the ingredient can be released more rapidly or
earlier.
[0251] The hydrophobicity of a polymer can be quantified by the
relative water-absorption measured according to ASTM D570-98. Thus,
by selecting encapsulating material(s) for a delivery system with
relatively lower water-absorption properties and adding that to a
mixer, the release of the ingredient contained in the produced
delivery system can be delayed compared to those encapsulating
materials having higher water-absorption properties.
[0252] In some embodiments, polymers with water absorption of from
about 50 to 100% (as measured according to ASTM D570-98) can be
used. Moreover, to decrease the relative delivery rate, the
encapsulating material can be selected such that the water
absorption would be from about 15% to about 50% (as measured
according to ASTM D570-98). Still further, in other embodiments,
the water absorption properties of the encapsulating material can
be selected to be from 0.0% to about 5% or up to about 15% (as
measured according to ASTM D570-98). In other embodiments, mixtures
of two or more delivery systems formulated with encapsulating
material having different water-absorption properties can also be
used in subsequent incorporation into a chewing gum
composition.
[0253] Polymers with suitable hydrophobicity which may be used for
delivery systems include homo- and co-polymers of, for example,
vinyl acetate, vinyl alcohol, ethylene, acrylic acid, methacrylate,
methacrylic acid and others. Suitable hydrophobic copolymers
include the following non-limiting examples, vinyl acetate/vinyl
alcohol copolymer, ethylene/vinyl alcohol copolymer,
ethylene/acrylic acid copolymer, ethylene/methacrylate copolymer,
ethylene/methacrylic acid copolymer.
[0254] In some examples, the hydrophobic encapsulating material in
a delivery system may be present in amounts of from about 0.2% to
10% by weight based on the total weight of a chewing gum
composition containing the delivery system, including 0.3, 0.5,
0.7, 0.9, 1.0, 1.25, 1.4, 1.7, 1.9, 2.2, 2.45, 2.75, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0,
4.25, 4.8, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 7.0, 7.25, 7.75, 8.0, 8.3, 8.7, 9.0,
9.25, 9.5, 9.8 and all values and ranges there between, for
example, from 1% to 5% by weight. The amount of the encapsulating
material will, of course, depend in part on the amount of the
ingredient that is encapsulated. The amount of the encapsulating
material with respect to the weight of the delivery system, is from
about 30% to 99%, including 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80,
85, 95, 97 and all values and ranges there between, for example,
from about 60% to 90% by weight.
[0255] In formulating the delivery system based on the selection
criteria of hydrophobicity of the encapsulating material, the
encapsulated ingredient can be entirely encapsulated within the
encapsulating material or incompletely encapsulated within the
encapsulating material provided the resulting delivery system meets
the criteria set forth hereinabove. The incomplete encapsulation
can be accomplished by modifying and/or adjusting the manufacturing
process to create partial coverage of the ingredient.
[0256] For example, if ethylene-vinyl acetate is the encapsulating
material for an ingredient, the degree of hydrophobicity can be
controlled by adjusting the ratio of ethylene and vinyl acetate in
the copolymer. The higher the ethylene to vinylacetate ratio, the
slower the release of the ingredient. Using vinylacetate/ethylene
copolymer as an example, the ratio of the vinylacetate/ethylene in
the copolymer can be from about 1 to about 60%, including ratios of
2.5, 5, 7.5, 9, 12, 18, 23, 25, 28, 30, 35, 42, 47, 52, 55, 58.5%
and all values and ranges there between.
[0257] In some embodiments, a method of selecting a target delivery
system containing an ingredient for a chewing gum composition is
based on the hydrophobicity of the encapsulating material for the
ingredient in the delivery system. The method generally includes
preparing a targeted delivery system containing an ingredient to be
encapsulated, an encapsulating material and optional additives,
with the encapsulating material having a pre-selected or otherwise
desired hydrophobicity. The hydrophobicity of the encapsulating
material employed in the targeted delivery system can be selected
to provide a desirable release rate of the ingredient. This
selection of the encapsulating material is based on the
hydrophobicity of sample delivery systems having the same or
similar ingredient and known release rates of the ingredient. In a
more preferred another embodiment of the invention, the method
comprises (a) obtaining a plurality of sample delivery systems
comprising at least one ingredient, at least one encapsulating
material, and optional additives, wherein each of the delivery
systems is prepared with different encapsulating materials having
different hydrophobicities; (b) testing the sample delivery systems
to determine the respective release rates of the ingredient(s); and
(c) formulating a target delivery system containing the same
ingredient(s) with a hydrophobic encapsulating material
corresponding to a desired release rate of the ingredient(s) based
on the obtained sample delivery systems.
[0258] The method of selecting at least one delivery system
suitable for incorporation into a chewing gum composition
preferably can begin by determining a desired release rate for an
ingredient (i.e., a first active component). The determination of
the desired release rate may be from known literature or technical
references or by in vitro or in vivo testing. Once the desired
release rate is determined, the desired hydrophobicity of the
encapsulating material can be determined (i.e., a first hydrophobic
encapsulating material) for a delivery system (i.e., first delivery
system) that can release the first active component at the desired
release. Once the delivery system is obtained which can deliver the
first active component as required it is then selected for eventual
inclusion in a chewing gum composition.
[0259] The method described above may then be repeated for a second
active component and for additional active components as described
via the determination and selection of a suitable delivery
system.
[0260] For additional information regarding the relationship of
hydrophobicity of an encapsulating material to the release of an
ingredient from a delivery system, see U.S. Patent Application Ser.
No. 60/683,634 entitled "Methods and Delivery Systems for Managing
Release of One or More Ingredients in an Edible Composition" and
filed on May 23, 2005, with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office,
the complete contents of which are incorporated herein by reference
for all purposes.
Ratio of Ingredient to Encapsulating Material for Ingredient in
Delivery System
[0261] In general, the "loading" of an ingredient in a delivery
system can impact the release profile of the ingredient when the
ingredient is used in a chewing gum composition. Loading refers to
the amount of one or more ingredients contained in the delivery
relative to the amount of encapsulating material. More
specifically, the ratio of the amount of one or more ingredients in
a delivery system to the amount of encapsulating material in the
delivery system can impact the release rate of the one or more
ingredients. For example, the lower the ratio or loading of the
amount of one or more ingredients in a delivery system to the
amount of encapsulating material in the delivery system, the longer
or more delayed will be the release of the one or more ingredients
from the delivery system. The higher the ratio or loading of the
amount of one or more ingredients in a delivery system to the
amount of encapsulating material in the delivery system, the faster
or earlier will be the release of the one or more ingredients from
the delivery system. This principle can be further employed to
manage the release profiles of the one or more ingredients by using
higher loading of ingredients designed to be released early in
combination with lower loading of ingredients designed to be
released later. In some embodiments, the one or more ingredients
can be the same or different.
[0262] As a more specific example, three delivery systems including
aspartame encapsulated with a polyvinylacetate and a fat were
created using a conventional mixing process wherein the polyvinyl
acetate first was melted in a mixer. The aspartame and fat then
were added and the three ingredients were mixed to create a
homogenous mixture. The delivery systems had the following
aspartame to polyvinyl to fat ratios: (1) 5:90:5; (2) 15:80:5, (3)
30:65:5. The molten delivery systems were cooled and sized by
passing ground powder through a 420 micron screen. Three chewing
gums where created, each using a different delivery system. It was
determined that the chewing gum using the first ratio of the
ingredients had a lower or slower release of aspartame that the
chewing gums using the second or third ratios of the ingredients.
Similarly, the gum using the second ratio of the ingredients had a
lower or slower release of aspartame than the chewing gum using the
third ratio of the ingredients.
[0263] For additional information regarding the relationship of the
ratio of the amount ingredient in a delivery system to the amount
of encapsulating material in the delivery system to the release of
an ingredient from a delivery system, see U.S. patent application
Ser. No. 11/134,371 entitled "A Delivery System For Active
Components as Part of and Edible Composition Including a Ratio of
Encapsulating Material and Active Component" and filed on May 23,
2005, with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, the complete
contents of which are incorporated herein by reference for all
purposes.
[0264] There are many types of ingredients for which managed
release of the ingredients from a chewing gum composition may be
desired. In addition, there are many groups of two or more
ingredients for which managed release of the group of ingredients
from a chewing gum composition may be desired.
[0265] In some embodiments, flavorants may include those flavors
known to the skilled artisan, such as natural and artificial
flavors. These flavorings may be chosen from synthetic flavor oils
and flavoring aromatics and/or oils, oleoresins and extracts
derived from plants, leaves, flowers, fruits, and so forth, and
combinations thereof. Nonlimiting representative flavor oils
include spearmint oil, cinnamon oil, oil of wintergreen (methyl
salicylate), peppermint oil, Japanese mint oil, clove oil, bay oil,
anise oil, eucalyptus oil, thyme oil, cedar leaf oil, oil of
nutmeg, allspice, oil of sage, mace, oil of bitter almonds, and
cassia oil. Also useful flavorings are artificial, natural and
synthetic fruit flavors such as vanilla, and citrus oils including
lemon, orange, lime, grapefruit, yazu, sudachi, and fruit essences
including apple, pear, peach, grape, blueberry, strawberry,
raspberry, cherry, plum, pineapple, watermelon, apricot, banana,
melon, apricot, ume, cherry, raspberry, blackberry, tropical fruit,
mango, mangosteen, pomegranate, papaya and so forth. Other
potential flavors whose release profiles can be managed include a
milk flavor, a butter flavor, a cheese flavor, a cream flavor, and
a yogurt flavor; a vanilla flavor; tea or coffee flavors, such as a
green tea flavor, a oolong tea flavor, a tea flavor, a cocoa
flavor, a chocolate flavor, and a coffee flavor; mint flavors, such
as a peppermint flavor, a spearmint flavor, and a Japanese mint
flavor; spicy flavors, such as an asafetida flavor, an ajowan
flavor, an anise flavor, an angelica flavor, a fennel flavor, an
allspice flavor, a cinnamon flavor, a camomile flavor, a mustard
flavor, a cardamom flavor, a caraway flavor, a cumin flavor, a
clove flavor, a pepper flavor, a coriander flavor, a sassafras
flavor, a savory flavor, a Zanthoxyli Fructus flavor, a perilla
flavor, a juniper berry flavor, a ginger flavor, a star anise
flavor, a horseradish flavor, a thyme flavor, a tarragon flavor, a
dill flavor, a capsicum flavor, a nutmeg flavor, a basil flavor, a
marjoram flavor, a rosemary flavor, a bayleaf flavor, and a wasabi
(Japanese horseradish) flavor; alcoholic flavors, such as a wine
flavor, a whisky flavor, a brandy flavor, a rum flavor, a gin
flavor, and a liqueur flavor; floral flavors; and vegetable
flavors, such as an onion flavor, a garlic flavor, a cabbage
flavor, a carrot flavor, a celery flavor, mushroom flavor, and a
tomato flavor. These flavoring agents may be used in liquid or
solid form and may be used individually or in admixture. Commonly
used flavors include mints such as peppermint, menthol, spearmint,
artificial vanilla, cinnamon derivatives, and various fruit
flavors, whether employed individually or in admixture. Flavors may
also provide breath freshening properties, particularly the mint
flavors when used in combination with the cooling agents, described
herein below.
[0266] In some embodiments, other flavorings include aldehydes and
esters such as cinnamyl acetate, cinnamaldehyde, citral
diethylacetal, dihydrocarvyl acetate, eugenyl formate,
p-methylamisol, and so forth may be used. Generally any flavoring
or food additive such as those described in Chemicals Used in Food
Processing, publication 1274, pages 63-258, by the National Academy
of Sciences, may be used. This publication is incorporated herein
by reference. These may include natural as well as synthetic
flavors.
[0267] Further examples of aldehyde flavorings include but are not
limited to acetaldehyde (apple), benzaldehyde (cherry, almond),
anisic aldehyde (licorice, anise), cinnamic aldehyde (cinnamon),
citral, i.e., alpha-citral (lemon, lime), neral, i.e., beta-citral
(lemon, lime), decanal (orange, lemon), ethyl vanillin (vanilla,
cream), heliotrope, i.e., piperonal (vanilla, cream), vanillin
(vanilla, cream), alpha-amyl cinnamaldehyde (spicy fruity flavors),
butyraldehyde (butter, cheese), valeraldehyde (butter, cheese),
citronellal (modifies, many types), decanal (citrus fruits),
aldehyde C-8 (citrus fruits), aldehyde C-9 (citrus fruits),
aldehyde C-12 (citrus fruits), 2-ethyl butyraldehyde (berry
fruits), hexenal, i.e., trans-2 (berry fruits), tolyl aldehyde
(cherry, almond), veratraldehyde (vanilla),
2,6-dimethyl-5-heptenal, .e., melonal (melon), 2,6-dimethyloctanal
(green fruit), and 2-dodecenal (citrus, mandarin), cherry, grape,
blueberry, blackberry, strawberry shortcake, and mixtures
thereof.
[0268] In some embodiments, a flavoring agent may be employed in
either liquid form and/or dried form. When employed in the latter
form, suitable drying means such as spray drying the liquid may be
used. Alternatively, the flavoring agent may be absorbed onto water
soluble materials, such as cellulose, starch, sugar, maltodextrin,
gum arabic and so forth or may be encapsulated. In still other
embodiments, the flavoring agent may be adsorbed onto silicas,
zeolites, and the like.
[0269] In some embodiments, the flavoring agents may be used in
many distinct physical forms. Without being limited thereto, such
physical forms include free forms, such as spray dried, powdered,
beaded forms, encapsulated forms, and mixtures thereof.
[0270] Illustrations of the encapsulation of flavors as well as
other additional components can be found in the examples provided
herein. Typically, encapsulation of a component will result in a
delay in the release of the predominant amount of the component
during consumption of a chewing gum composition that includes the
encapsulated component (e.g., as part of a delivery system added as
an ingredient to the chewing gum composition). In some embodiments,
the release profile of the ingredient (e.g., the flavor, sweetener,
etc.) can be managed by managing various characteristics of the
ingredient, delivery system containing the ingredient, and/or the
chewing gum composition containing the delivery system and/or how
the delivery system is made. For example, characteristics might
include one or more of the following: tensile strength of the
delivery system, water solubility of the ingredient, water
solubility of the encapsulating material, water solubility of the
delivery system, ratio of ingredient to encapsulating material in
the delivery system, average or maximum particle size of
ingredient, average or maximum particle size of ground delivery
system, the amount of the ingredient or the delivery system in the
chewing gum composition, ratio of different polymers used to
encapsulate one or more ingredients, hydrophobicity of one or more
polymers used to encapsulate one or more ingredients,
hydrophobicity of the delivery system, the type or amount of
coating on the delivery system, the type or amount of coating on an
ingredient prior to the ingredient being encapsulated, etc.
Sweetening Ingredients
[0271] The sweeteners involved may be selected from a wide range of
materials including water-soluble sweeteners, water-soluble
artificial sweeteners, water-soluble sweeteners derived from
naturally occurring water-soluble sweeteners, dipeptide based
sweeteners, and protein based sweeteners, including mixtures
thereof. Without being limited to particular sweeteners,
representative categories and examples include:
[0272] (a) water-soluble sweetening agents such as
dihydrochalcones, monellin, steviosides, glycyrrhizin,
dihydroflavenol, and sugar alcohols such as sorbitol, mannitol,
maltitol, xylitol, erythritol, and L-aminodicarboxylic acid
aminoalkenoic acid ester amides, such as those disclosed in U.S.
Pat. No. 4,619,834, which disclosure is incorporated herein by
reference, and mixtures thereof;
[0273] (b) water-soluble artificial sweeteners such as soluble
saccharin salts, i.e., sodium or calcium saccharin salts, cyclamate
salts, the sodium, ammonium or calcium salt of
3,4-dihydro-6-methyl-1,2,3-oxathiazine-4-one-2,2-dioxide, the
potassium salt of
3,4-dihydro-6-methyl-1,2,3-oxathiazine-4-one-2,2-dioxide
(Acesulfame-K), the free acid form of saccharin, and mixtures
thereof;
[0274] (c) dipeptide based sweeteners, such as L-aspartic acid
derived sweeteners, such as L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
(Aspartame),
N-[N-(3,3-dimethylbutyl)-L-.alpha.-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine
1-methyl ester (Neotame), and materials described in U.S. Pat. No.
3,492,131,
L-alphaaspartyl-N-(2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-thietanyl)-D-alaninamide
hydrate (Alitame), methyl esters of L-aspartyl-L-phenylglycerine
and L-aspartyl-L-2,5-dihydrophenyl-glycine,
L-aspartyl-2,5-dihydro-L-phenylalanine;
L-aspartyl-L-(1-cyclohexen)-alanine, and mixtures thereof;
[0275] (d) water-soluble sweeteners derived from naturally
occurring water-soluble sweeteners, such as chlorinated derivatives
of ordinary sugar (sucrose), e.g., chlorodeoxysugar derivatives
such as derivatives of chlorodeoxysucrose or
chlorodeoxygalactosucrose, known, for example, under the product
designation of Sucralose; examples of chlorodeoxysucrose and
chlorodeoxygalactosucrose derivatives include but are not limited
to: 1-chloro-1'-deoxysucrose;
4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-D-galactopyranosyl-alpha-D-fructofuranoside,
or 4-chloro-4-deoxygalactosucrose;
4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-D-galactopyranosyl-1-chloro-1-deoxy-beta-D-fructo--
furanoside, or 4,1'-dichloro-4,1'-dideoxygalactosucrose;
1',6'-dichloro 1',6'-dideoxysucrose;
4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-D-galactopyranosyl-1,6-dichloro-1,6-dideoxy-beta-D-
-fructofuranoside, or
4,1',6'-trichloro-4,1',6'-trideoxygalactosucrose;
4,6-dichloro-4,6-dideoxy-alpha-D-galactopyranosyl-6-chloro-6-deoxy-beta-D-
-fructofuranoside, or
4,6,6'-trichloro-4,6,6'-trideoxygalactosucrose;
6,1',6'-trichloro-6,1',6'-trideoxysucrose;
4,6-dichloro-4,6-dideoxy-alpha-D-galacto-pyranosyl-1,6-dichloro-1,6-dideo-
xy-beta-D-fructofuranoside, or
4,6,1',6'-tetrachloro4,6,1',6'-tetradeoxygalacto-sucrose; and
4,6,1',6'-tetradeoxy-sucrose, and mixtures thereof;
[0276] (e) protein based sweeteners such as thaumaoccous danielli
(Thaumatin I and II) and talin; and
[0277] (f) the sweetener monatin
(2-hydroxy-2-(indol-3-ylmethyl)-4-aminoglutaric acid) and its
derivatives.
[0278] The intense sweetening agents may be used in many distinct
physical forms well-known in the art to provide an initial burst of
sweetness and/or a prolonged sensation of sweetness. Without being
limited thereto, such physical forms include free forms, spray
dried forms, powdered forms, beaded forms, encapsulated forms, and
mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, the sweetener is a high
intensity sweetener such as aspartame, sucralose, and acesulfame
potassium (e.g., Ace-K).
[0279] In some embodiments, the sweetener may be a polyol. Polyols
can include, but are not limited to glycerol, sorbitol, maltitol,
maltitol syrup, mannitol, isomalt, erythritol, xylitol,
hydrogenated starch hydrolysates, polyglycitol syrups, polyglycitol
powders, lactitol, and combinations thereof.
[0280] The active component (e.g., sweetener), which is part of the
delivery system, may be used in amounts necessary to impart the
desired effect associated with use of the active component (e.g.,
sweetness). In general, an effective amount of intense sweetener
may be utilized to provide the level of sweetness desired, and this
amount may vary with the sweetener selected. The intense sweetener
may be present in amounts from about 0.001% to about 3%, by weight
of the composition, depending upon the sweetener or combination of
sweeteners used. The exact range of amounts for each type of
sweetener may be selected by those skilled in the art.
Sensate Ingredients
[0281] Sensate compounds can include cooling agents, warming
agents, tingling agents, effervescent agents, and combinations
thereof. A variety of well known cooling agents may be employed.
For example, among the useful cooling agents are included xylitol,
erythritol, dextrose, sorbitol, menthane, menthone, ketals,
menthone ketals, menthone glycerol ketals, substituted p-menthanes,
acyclic carboxamides, mono menthyl glutarate, substituted
cyclohexanamides, substituted cyclohexane carboxamides, substituted
ureas and sulfonamides, substituted menthanols, hydroxymethyl and
hydroxymethyl derivatives of p-menthane, 2-mercapto-cyclo-decanone,
hydroxycarboxylic acids with 2-6 carbon atoms, cyclohexanamides,
menthyl acetate, menthyl salicylate, N,2,3-trimethyl-2-isopropyl
butanamide (WS-23), N-ethyl-p-menthane-3-carboxamide (WS-3),
isopulegol, 3-(1-menthoxy)propane-1,2-diol,
3-(1-menthoxy)-2-methylpropane-1,2-diol, p-menthane-2,3-diol,
p-menthane-3,8-diol,
6-isopropyl-9-methyl-1,4-dioxaspiro[4,5]decane-2-methanol, menthyl
succinate and its alkaline earth metal salts,
trimethylcyclohexanol,
N-ethyl-2-isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexanecarboxamide, Japanese mint
oil, peppermint oil, 3-(1-menthoxy)ethan-1-ol,
3-(1-menthoxy)propan-1-ol, 3-(1-menthoxy)butan-1-ol,
1-menthylacetic acid N-ethylamide, 1-menthyl-4-hydroxypentanoate,
1-menthyl-3-hydroxybutyrate,
N,2,3-trimethyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-butanamide, n-ethyl-t-2-c-6
nonadienamide, N,N-dimethyl menthyl succinamide, substituted
p-menthanes, substituted p-menthane-carboxamides,
2-isopropanyl-5-methylcyclohexanol (from Hisamitsu Pharmaceuticals,
hereinafter "isopregol"); menthone glycerol ketals (FEMA 3807,
tradename FRESCOLAT(.RTM. type MGA); 3-1-menthoxypropane-1,2-diol
(from Takasago, FEMA 3784); and menthyl lactate; (from Haarman
& Reimer, FEMA 3748, tradename FRESCOLAT.RTM. type ML), WS-30,
WS-14, Eucalyptus extract (p-Mehtha-3,8-Diol), Menthol (its natural
or synthetic derivatives), Menthol PG carbonate, Menthol EG
carbonate, Menthol glyceryl ether,
N-tertbutyl-p-menthane-3-carboxamide, P-menthane-3-carboxylic acid
glycerol ester, Methyl-2-isopryl-bicyclo (2.2.1),
Heptane-2-carboxamide; and Menthol methyl ether, and menthyl
pyrrolidone carboxylate among others. These and other suitable
cooling agents are further described in the following U.S. patents,
all of which are incorporated in their entirety by reference
hereto: U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,230,688; 4,032,661; 4,459,425; 4,136,163;
5,266,592; 6,627,233.
[0282] In some embodiments, warming components may be selected from
a wide variety of compounds known to provide the sensory signal of
warming to the user. These compounds offer the perceived sensation
of warmth, particularly in the oral cavity, and often enhance the
perception of flavors, sweeteners and other organoleptic
components. In some embodiments, useful warming compounds can
include vanillyl alcohol n-butylether (TK-1000) supplied by
Takasago Perfumary Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan, vanillyl alcohol
n-propylether, vanillyl alcohol isopropylether, vanillyl alcohol
isobutylether, vanillyl alcohol n-aminoether, vanillyl alcohol
isoamyleather, vanillyl alcohol n-hexyleather, vanillyl alcohol
methylether, vanillyl alcohol ethylether, gingerol, shogaol,
paradol, zingerone, capsaicin, dihydrocapsaicin,
nordihydrocapsaicin, homocapsaicin, homodihydrocapsaicin, ethanol,
isopropyl alcohol, iso-amylalcohol, benzyl alcohol, glycerine, and
combinations thereof.
[0283] In some embodiments, a tingling sensation can be provided.
One such tingling sensation is provided by adding jambu, oleoresin,
or spilanthol to some examples. In some embodiments, alkylamides
extracted from materials such as jambu or sanshool can be included.
Additionally, in some embodiments, a sensation is created due to
effervescence. Such effervescence is created by combining an
alkaline material with an acidic material. In some embodiments, an
alkaline material can include alkali metal carbonates, alkali metal
bicarbonates, alkaline earth metal carbonates, alkaline earth metal
bicarbonates and mixtures thereof. In some embodiments, an acidic
material can include acetic acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid,
butyric acid, citric acid, formic acid, fumaric acid, glyconic
acid, lactic acid, phosphoric acid, malic acid, oxalic acid,
succinic acid, tartaric acid and combinations thereof. Examples of
"tingling" type sensates can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,780,443,
the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference
for all purposes.
[0284] Sensate components may also be referred to as "trigeminal
stimulants" such as those disclosed in U.S. Patent Application No.
205/0202118, which is incorporated herein by reference. Trigeminal
stimulants are defined as an orally consumed product or agent that
stimulates the trigeminal nerve. Examples of cooling agents which
are trigeminal stimulants include menthol, WS-3, N-substituted
p-menthane carboxamide, acyclic carboxamides including WS-23,
methyl succinate, menthone glycerol ketals, bulk sweeteners such as
xylitol, erythritol, dextrose, and sorbitol, and combinations
thereof. Trigeminal stimulants can also include flavors, tingling
agents, Jambu extract, vanillyl alkyl ethers, such as vanillyl
n-butyl ether, spilanthol, Echinacea extract, Northern Prickly Ash
extract, capsaicin, capsicum oleoresin, red pepper oleoresin, black
pepper oleoresin, piperine, ginger oleoresin, gingerol, shoagol,
cinnamon oleoresin, cassia oleoresin, cinnamic aldehyde, eugenol,
cyclic acetal of vanillin and menthol glycerin ether, unsaturated
amides, and combinations thereof.
Breath Freshening Ingredients
[0285] Breath fresheners can include essential oils as well as
various aldehydes, alcohols, and similar materials. In some
embodiments, essential oils can include oils of spearmint,
peppermint, wintergreen, sassafras, chlorophyll, citral, geraniol,
cardamom, clove, sage, carvacrol, eucalyptus, cardamom, magnolia
bark extract, marjoram, cinnamon, lemon, lime, grapefruit, and
orange. In some embodiments, aldehydes such as cinnamic aldehyde
and salicylaldehyde can be used. Additionally, chemicals such as
menthol, carvone, iso-garrigol, and anethole can function as breath
fresheners. Of these, the most commonly employed are oils of
peppermint, spearmint and chlorophyll.
[0286] In addition to essential oils and chemicals derived from
them, in some embodiments breath fresheners can include but are not
limited to zinc citrate, zinc acetate, zinc fluoride, zinc ammonium
sulfate, zinc bromide, zinc iodide, zinc chloride, zinc nitrate,
zinc flurosilicate, zinc gluconate, zinc tartarate, zinc succinate,
zinc formate, zinc chromate, zinc phenol sulfonate, zinc
dithionate, zinc sulfate, silver nitrate, zinc salicylate, zinc
glycerophosphate, copper nitrate, chlorophyll, copper chlorophyll,
chlorophyllin, hydrogenated cottonseed oil, chlorine dioxide, beta
cyclodextrin, zeolite, silica-based materials, carbon-based
materials, enzymes such as laccase, and combinations thereof. In
some embodiments, the release profiles of probiotics can be managed
for a gum including, but not limited to lactic acid producing
microorganisms such as Bacillus coagulans, Bacillus subtilis,
Bacillus laterosporus, Bacillus laevolacticus, Sporolactobacillus
inulinus, Lactobacillus acidophilus, Lactobacillus curvatus,
Lactobacillus plantarum, Lactobacillus jenseni, Lactobacillus
casei, Lactobacillus fermentum, Lactococcus lactis, Pedioccocus
acidilacti, Pedioccocus pentosaceus, Pedioccocus urinae,
Leuconostoc mesenteroides, Bacillus coagulans, Bacillus subtilis,
Bacillus laterosporus, Bacillus laevolacticus, Sporolactobacillus
inulinus and mixtures thereof. Breath fresheners are also known by
the following trade names: Retsyn,.TM. Actizol,.TM. and
Nutrazin..TM. Examples of malodor-controlling compositions are also
included in U.S. Pat. No. 5,300,305 to Stapler et al. and in U.S.
Patent Application Publication Nos. 2003/0215417 and 2004/0081713
which are incorporated in their entirety herein by reference for
all purposes.
Dental Care Ingredients
[0287] Dental care ingredients (also known as oral care
ingredients) may include but are not limited to tooth whiteners,
stain removers, oral cleaning, bleaching agents, desensitizing
agents, dental remineralization agents, antibacterial agents,
anticaries agents, plaque acid buffering agents, surfactants and
anticalculus agents. Non-limiting examples of such ingredients can
include, hydrolytic agents including proteolytic enzymes, abrasives
such as hydrated silica, calcium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate and
alumina, other active stain-removing components such as
surface-active agents, including, but not limited to anionic
surfactants such as sodium stearate, sodium palminate, sulfated
butyl oleate, sodium oleate, salts of fumaric acid, glycerol,
hydroxylated lecithin, sodium lauryl sulfate and chelators such as
polyphosphates, which are typically employed as tartar control
ingredients. In some embodiments, dental care ingredients can also
include tetrasodium pyrophosphate and sodium tri-polyphosphate,
sodium bicarbonate, sodium acid pyrophosphate, sodium
tripolyphosphate, xylitol, sodium hexametaphosphate.
[0288] In some embodiments, peroxides such as carbamide peroxide,
calcium peroxide, magnesium peroxide, sodium peroxide, hydrogen
peroxide, and peroxydiphospate are included. In some embodiments,
potassium nitrate and potassium citrate are included. Other
examples can include casein glycomacropeptide, calcium casein
peptone-calcium phosphate, casein phosphopeptides, casein
phosphopeptide-amorphous calcium phosphate (CPP-ACP), and amorphous
calcium phosphate. Still other examples can include papaine,
krillase, pepsin, trypsin, lysozyme, dextranase, mutanase,
glycoamylase, amylase, glucose oxidase, and combinations
thereof.
[0289] Further examples can include surfactants such as sodium
stearate, sodium ricinoleate, and sodium lauryl sulfate surfactants
for use in some embodiments to achieve increased prophylactic
action and to render the dental care ingredients more cosmetically
acceptable. Surfactants can preferably be detersive materials which
impart to the composition detersive and foaming properties.
Suitable examples of surfactants are water-soluble salts of higher
fatty acid monoglyceride monosulfates, such as the sodium salt of
the monosulfated monoglyceride of hydgrogenated coconut oil fatty
acids, higher alkyl sulfates such as sodium lauryl sulfate, alkyl
aryl sulfonates such as sodium dodecyl benzene sulfonate, higher
alkyl sulfoacetates, sodium lauryl sulfoacetate, higher fatty acid
esters of 1,2-dihydroxy propane sulfonate, and the substantially
saturated higher aliphatic acyl amides of lower aliphatic amino
carboxylic acid compounds, such as those having 12 to 16 carbons in
the fatty acid, alkyl or acyl radicals, and the like. Examples of
the last mentioned amides are N-lauroyl sarcosine, and the sodium,
potassium, and ethanolamine salts of N-lauroyl, N-myristoyl, or
N-palmitoyl sarcosine.
[0290] In addition to surfactants, dental care ingredients can
include antibacterial agents such as, but not limited to,
triclosan, chlorhexidine, zinc citrate, silver nitrate, copper,
limonene, and cetyl pyridinium chloride. In some embodiments,
additional anticaries agents can include fluoride ions or
fluorine-providing components such as inorganic fluoride salts. In
some embodiments, soluble alkali metal salts, for example, sodium
fluoride, potassium fluoride, sodium fluorosilicate, ammonium
fluorosilicate, sodium monofluorophosphate, as well as tin
fluorides, such as stannous fluoride and stannous chloride can be
included. In some embodiments, a fluorine-containing compound
having a beneficial effect on the care and hygiene of the oral
cavity, e.g., diminution of enamel solubility in acid and
protection of the teeth against decay may also be included as an
ingredient. Examples thereof include sodium fluoride, stannous
fluoride, potassium fluoride, potassium stannous fluoride
(SnF.sub.2-KF), sodium hexafluorostannate, stannous chlorofluoride,
sodium fluorozirconate, and sodium monofluorophosphate. In some
embodiments, urea is included.
[0291] Further examples are included in the following U.S. patents
and U.S. published patent applications, the contents of all of
which are incorporated in their entirety herein by reference for
all purposes: U.S. Pat. No. 5,227,154 to Reynolds, U.S. Pat. No.
5,378,131 to Greenberg, U.S. Pat. No. 6,846,500 to Luo et al., U.S.
Pat. No. 6,733,818 to Luo et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,696,044 to Luo et
al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,685,916 to Holme et al., U.S. Pat. No.
6,485,739 to Luo et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,479,071 to Holme et al.,
U.S. Pat. No. 6,471,945 to Luo et al., U.S. Patent Publication Nos.
20050025721 to Holme et al., 2005008732 to Gebreselassie et al.,
and 20040136928 to Holme et al.
Active Ingredients
[0292] Actives generally refer to those ingredients that are
included in a delivery system and/or chewing gum composition for
the desired end benefit they provide to the user. In some
embodiments, actives can include medicaments, nutrients,
nutraceuticals, herbals, nutritional supplements, pharmaceuticals,
drugs, and the like and combinations thereof.
[0293] Examples of useful drugs include ace-inhibitors, antianginal
drugs, anti-arrhythmias, anti-asthmatics, anti-cholesterolemics,
analgesics, anesthetics, anti-convulsants, anti-depressants,
anti-diabetic agents, anti-diarrhea preparations, antidotes,
anti-histamines, anti-hypertensive drugs, anti-inflammatory agents,
anti-lipid agents, anti-manics, anti-nauseants, anti-stroke agents,
anti-thyroid preparations, anti-tumor drugs, anti-viral agents,
acne drugs, alkaloids, amino acid preparations, anti-tussives,
anti-uricemic drugs, anti-viral drugs, anabolic preparations,
systemic and non-systemic anti-infective agents, anti-neoplastics,
anti-parkinsonian agents, anti-rheumatic agents, appetite
stimulants, biological response modifiers, blood modifiers, bone
metabolism regulators, cardiovascular agents, central nervous
system stimulates, cholinesterase inhibitors, contraceptives,
decongestants, dietary supplements, dopamine receptor agonists,
endometriosis management agents, enzymes, erectile dysfunction
therapies such as sildenafil citrate, which is currently marketed
as Viagra.TM., fertility agents, gastrointestinal agents,
homeopathic remedies, hormones, hypercalcemia and hypocalcemia
management agents, immunomodulators, immunosuppressives, migraine
preparations, motion sickness treatments, muscle relaxants, obesity
management agents, osteoporosis preparations, oxytocics,
parasympatholytics, parasympathomimetics, prostaglandins,
psychotherapeutic agents, respiratory agents, sedatives, smoking
cessation aids such as bromocryptine or nicotine, sympatholytics,
tremor preparations, urinary tract agents, vasodilators, laxatives,
antacids, ion exchange resins, anti-pyretics, appetite
suppressants, expectorants, anti-anxiety agents, anti-ulcer agents,
anti-inflammatory substances, coronary dilators, cerebral dilators,
peripheral vasodilators, psycho-tropics, stimulants,
anti-hypertensive drugs, vasoconstrictors, migraine treatments,
antibiotics, tranquilizers, anti-psychotics, anti-tumor drugs,
anti-coagulants, anti-thrombotic drugs, hypnotics, anti-emetics,
anti-nauseants, anti-convulsants, neuromuscular drugs, hyper- and
hypo-glycemic agents, thyroid and anti-thyroid preparations,
diuretics, anti-spasmodics, terine relaxants, anti-obesity drugs,
erythropoietic drugs, anti-asthmatics, cough suppressants,
mucolytics, DNA and genetic modifying drugs, and combinations
thereof.
[0294] Examples of active ingredients contemplated for use in the
present invention can include antacids, H2-antagonists, and
analgesics. For example, antacid dosages can be prepared using the
ingredients calcium carbonate alone or in combination with
magnesium hydroxide, and/or aluminum hydroxide. Moreover, antacids
can be used in combination with H2-antagonists.
[0295] Analgesics include opiates and opiate derivatives, such as
Oxycontin.TM., ibuprofen, aspirin, acetaminophen, and combinations
thereof that may optionally include caffeine.
[0296] Other drug active ingredients for use in embodiments can
include anti-diarrheals such as Immodium.TM. AD, anti-histamines,
anti-tussives, decongestants, vitamins, and breath fresheners. Also
contemplated for use herein are anxiolytics such as Xanax.TM.;
anti-psychotics such as Clozaril.TM. and Haldol.TM.; non-steroidal
anti-inflammatories (NSAID's) such as ibuprofen, naproxen sodium,
Voltaren.TM. and Lodine.TM., anti-histamines such as Claritin.TM.,
Hismanal.TM., Relafen.TM., and Tavist.TM.; anti-emetics such as
Kytril.TM. and Cesamet.TM.; bronchodilators such as Bentolin.TM.,
Proventil.TM.; anti-depressants such as Prozac.TM., Zoloft.TM., and
Paxil.TM.; anti-migraines such as Imigra.TM., ACE-inhibitors such
as Vasotec.TM., Capoten.TM. and Zestril.TM.; anti-Alzheimer's
agents, such as Nicergoline.TM.; and CaH-antagonists such as
Procardia.TM., Adalat.TM., and Calan.TM..
[0297] The popular H2-antagonists which are contemplated for use in
the present invention include cimetidine, ranitidine hydrochloride,
famotidine, nizatidien, ebrotidine, mifentidine, roxatidine,
pisatidine and aceroxatidine.
[0298] Active antacid ingredients can include, but are not limited
to, the following: aluminum hydroxide, dihydroxyaluminum
aminoacetate, aminoacetic acid, aluminum phosphate,
dihydroxyaluminum sodium carbonate, bicarbonate, bismuth aluminate,
bismuth carbonate, bismuth subcarbonate, bismuth subgallate,
bismuth subnitrate, bismuth subsilysilate, calcium carbonate,
calcium phosphate, citrate ion (acid or salt), amino acetic acid,
hydrate magnesium aluminate sulfate, magaldrate, magnesium
aluminosilicate, magnesium carbonate, magnesium glycinate,
magnesium hydroxide, magnesium oxide, magnesium trisilicate, milk
solids, aluminum mono-ordibasic calcium phosphate, tricalcium
phosphate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium tartrate, sodium
bicarbonate, magnesium aluminosilicates, tartaric acids and
salts.
[0299] A variety of nutritional supplements may also be used as
active ingredients including virtually any vitamin or mineral. For
example, vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin D, vitamin E, vitamin K,
vitamin B.sub.6, vitamin B.sub.12, thiamine, riboflavin, biotin,
folic acid, niacin, pantothenic acid, sodium, potassium, calcium,
magnesium, phosphorus, sulfur, chlorine, iron, copper, iodine,
zinc, selenium, manganese, choline, chromium, molybdenum, fluorine,
cobalt and combinations thereof, maybe used.
[0300] Examples of nutritional supplements that can be used as
active ingredients are set forth in U.S. Patent Application
Publication Nos. 2003/0157213 A1, 2003/0206993 and 2003/0099741 A1
which are incorporated in their entirety herein by reference for
all purposes.
[0301] Various herbals may also be used as active ingredients such
as those with various medicinal or dietary supplement properties.
Herbals are generally aromatic plants or plant parts and or
extracts thereof that can be used medicinally or for flavoring.
Suitable herbals can be used singly or in various mixtures. Active
ingredients derived from herbal or botanical sources are sometimes
referred to as phytochemicals. Classes of phytochemicals include,
but are not limited to, polyphenols, flavonoids, flavanols,
flavonols, flavanones, isoflavanones, anthocyanins, catechins, and
flavonones. Commonly used herbs include Echinacea, Goldenseal,
Calendula, Rosemary, Thyme, Kava Kava, Aloe, Blood Root, Grapefruit
Seed Extract, Black Cohosh, Ginseng, Guarana, Cranberry, Gingko
Biloba, St. John's Wort, Evening Primrose Oil, Yohimbe Bark, Green
Tea, Ma Huang, Maca, Bilberry, Lutein, and combinations
thereof.
Effervescing System Ingredients
[0302] An effervescent system may include one or more edible acids
and one or more edible alkaline materials. The edible acid(s) and
the edible alkaline material(s) may react together to generate
effervescence.
[0303] In some embodiments, the alkaline material(s) may be
selected from, but is not limited to, alkali metal carbonates,
alkali metal bicarbonates, alkaline earth metal carbonates,
alkaline earth metal bicarbonates, and combinations thereof. The
edible acid(s) may be selected from, but is not limited to, citric
acid, phosphoric acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, ascorbic acid,
and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, an effervescing
system may include one or more other ingredients such as, for
example, carbon dioxide, oral care ingredients, flavorants,
etc.
[0304] For examples of use of an effervescing system in a chewing
gum, refer to U.S. Provisional Patent No. 60/618,222 filed Oct. 13,
2004, and entitled "Effervescent Pressed Gum Tablet Compositions,"
the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference for all
purposes. Other examples can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,235,318,
the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference for all
purposes.
Appetite Suppressor Ingredients
[0305] Appetite suppressors can be ingredients such as fiber and
protein that function to depress the desire to consume food.
Appetite suppressors can also include benzphetamine,
diethylpropion, mazindol, phendimetrazine, phentermine, hoodia
(P57), Olibra,.TM. ephedra, caffeine and combinations thereof.
Appetite suppressors are also known by the following trade names:
Adipex,.TM. Adipost,.TM. Bontril.TM. PDM, Bontril.TM. Slow Release,
Didrex,.TM. Fastin,.TM. Ionamin,.TM. Mazanor,.TM. Melfiat,.TM.
Obenix,.TM. Phendiet,.TM. Phendiet-105,.TM. Phentercot,.TM.
Phentride,.TM. Plegine,.TM. Prelu-2,.TM. Pro-Fast,.TM. PT 105,.TM.
Sanorex,.TM. Tenuate,.TM. Sanorex,.TM. Tenuate,.TM. Tenuate
Dospan,.TM. Tepanil Ten-Tab,.TM. Teramine,.TM. and Zantryl..TM.
These and other suitable appetite suppressors are further described
in the following U.S. patents, all of which are incorporated in
their entirety by reference hereto: U.S. Pat. No. 6,838,431 to
Portman, U.S. Pat. No. 6,716,815 to Portman, U.S. Pat. No.
6,558,690 to Portman, U.S. Pat. No. 6,468,962 to Portman, U.S. Pat.
No. 6,436,899 to Portman.
Potentiator Ingredients
[0306] Potentiators can consist of materials that may intensify,
supplement, modify or enhance the taste and/or aroma perception of
an original material without introducing a characteristic taste
and/or aroma perception of their own. In some embodiments,
potentiators designed to intensify, supplement, modify, or enhance
the perception of flavor, sweetness, tartness, umami, kokumi,
saltiness and combinations thereof can be included.
[0307] In some embodiments, examples of suitable potentiators, also
known as taste potentiators include, but are not limited to,
neohesperidin dihydrochalcone, chlorogenic acid, alapyridaine,
cynarin, miraculin, glupyridaine, pyridinium-betain compounds,
glutamates, such as monosodium glutamate and monopotassium
glutamate, neotame, thaumatin, tagatose, trehalose, salts, such as
sodium chloride, monoammonium glycyrrhizinate, vanilla extract (in
ethyl alcohol), sugar acids, potassium chloride, sodium acid
sulfate, hydrolyzed vegetable proteins, hydrolyzed animal proteins,
yeast extracts, adenosine monophosphate (AMP), glutathione,
nucleotides, such as inosine monophosphate, disodium inosinate,
xanthosine monophosphate, guanylate monophosphate,
alapyridaine(N-(1-carboxyethyl)-6-(hydroxymethyl)pyridinium-3-ol
inner salt, sugar beet extract (alcoholic extract), sugarcane leaf
essence (alcoholic extract), curculin, strogin, mabinlin, gymnemic
acid, 3-hydrobenzoic acid, 2,4-dihydrobenzoic acid, citrus
aurantium, vanilla oleoresin, sugarcane leaf essence, maltol, ethyl
maltol, vanillin, licorice glycyrrhizinates, compounds that respond
to G-protein coupled receptors (T2Rs and T1Rs) and taste
potentiator compositions that impart kokumi, as disclosed in U.S.
Pat. No. 5,679,397 to Kuroda et al., which is incorporated in its
entirety herein by reference. "Kokumi" refers to materials that
impart "mouthfulness" and "good body".
[0308] Sweetener potentiators, which are a type of taste
potentiator, enhance the taste of sweetness. In some embodiments,
exemplary sweetener potentiators include, but are not limited to,
monoammonium glycyrrhizinate, licorice glycyrrhizinates, citrus
aurantium, alapyridaine,
alapyridaine(N-(1-carboxyethyl)-6-(hydroxymethyl)pyridinium-3-ol)
inner salt, miraculin, curculin, strogin, mabinlin, gymnemic acid,
cynarin, glupyridaine, pyridinium-betain compounds, sugar beet
extract, neotame, thaumatin, neohesperidin dihydrochalcone,
tagatose, trehalose, maltol, ethyl maltol, vanilla extract, vanilla
oleoresin, vanillin, sugar beet extract (alcoholic extract),
sugarcane leaf essence (alcoholic extract), compounds that respond
to G-protein coupled receptors (T2Rs and T1Rs) and combinations
thereof.
[0309] Additional examples of potentiators for the enhancement of
salt taste include acidic peptides, such as those disclosed in U.S.
Pat. No. 6,974,597, herein incorporated by reference. Acidic
peptides include peptides having a larger number of acidic amino
acids, such as aspartic acid and glutamic acid, than basic amino
acids, such as lysine, arginine and histidine. The acidic peptides
are obtained by peptide synthesis or by subjecting proteins to
hydrolysis using endopeptidase, and if necessary, to deamidation.
Suitable proteins for use in the production of the acidic peptides
or the peptides obtained by subjecting a protein to hydrolysis and
deamidation include plant proteins, (e.g. wheat gluten, corn
protein (e.g., zein and gluten meal), soybean protein isolate),
animal proteins (e.g., milk proteins such as milk casein and milk
whey protein, muscle proteins such as meat protein and fish meat
protein, egg white protein and collagen), and microbial proteins
(e.g., microbial cell protein and polypeptides produced by
microorganisms).
[0310] The sensation of warming or cooling effects may also be
prolonged with the use of a hydrophobic sweetener as described in
U.S. Patent Application Publication 2003/0072842 A1 which is
incorporated in its entirety herein by reference. For example, such
hydrophobic sweeteners include those of the formulae I-XI as set
forth below:
##STR00001##
wherein X, Y and Z are selected from the group consisting of
CH.sub.2, O and S;
##STR00002##
wherein X and Y are selected from the group consisting of S and
O;
##STR00003##
wherein X is S or O; Y is O or CH.sub.2; Z is CH.sub.2, SO.sub.2 or
S; R is OCH.sub.3, OH or H; R.sup.1 is SH or OH and R.sup.2 is H or
OH;
##STR00004##
wherein X is C or S; R is OH or H and R.sup.1 is OCH.sub.3 or
OH;
##STR00005##
wherein R, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are OH or H and R.sup.1 is H or
COOH;
##STR00006##
wherein X is O or CH.sub.2 and R is COOH or H;
##STR00007##
wherein R is CH.sub.3CH.sub.2, OH, N(CH3).sub.2 or Cl;
##STR00008##
[0311] Perillartine may also be added as described in U.S. Pat. No.
6,159,509 also incorporated in its entirety herein by
reference.
Food Acid Ingredients
[0312] Acids can include, but are not limited to acetic acid,
adipic acid, ascorbic acid, butyric acid, citric acid, formic acid,
fumaric acid, glyconic acid, lactic acid, phosphoric acid, malic
acid, oxalic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid and combinations
thereof.
Micronutrient Ingredients
[0313] Micronutrients can include materials that have an impact on
the nutritional well being of an organism even though the quantity
required by the organism to have the desired effect is small
relative to macronutrients such as protein, carbohydrate, and fat.
Micronutrients can include, but are not limited to vitamins,
minerals, enzymes, phytochemicals, antioxidants, and combinations
thereof.
[0314] In some embodiments, vitamins can include fat soluble
vitamins such as vitamin A, vitamin D, vitamin E, and vitamin K and
combinations thereof. In some embodiments, vitamins can include
water soluble vitamins such as vitamin C (ascorbic acid), the B
vitamins (thiamine or B.sub.1, riboflavoin or B.sub.2, niacin or
B.sub.3, pyridoxine or B.sub.6, folic acid or B.sub.9,
cyanocobalimin or B.sub.12, pantothenic acid, biotin), and
combinations thereof.
[0315] In some embodiments minerals can include but are not limited
to sodium, magnesium, chromium, iodine, iron, manganese, calcium,
copper, fluoride, potassium, phosphorous, molybdenum, selenium,
zinc, and combinations thereof.
[0316] In some embodiments micronutrients can include but are not
limited to L-camitine, choline, coenzyme Q10, alpha-lipoic acid,
omega-3-fatty acids, pepsin, phytase, trypsin, lipases, proteases,
cellulases, and combinations thereof.
[0317] Antioxidants can include materials that scavenge free
radicals. In some embodiments, antioxidants can include but are not
limited to ascorbic acid, citric acid, rosemary oil, vitamin A,
vitamin E, vitamin E phosphate, tocopherols, di-alpha-tocopheryl
phosphate, tocotrienols, alpha lipoic acid, dihydrolipoic acid,
xanthophylls, beta cryptoxanthin, lycopene, lutein, zeaxanthin,
astaxanthin, beta-carotene, carotenes, mixed carotenoids,
polyphenols, flavonoids, and combinations thereof.
[0318] In some embodiments phytochemicals can include but are not
limited to cartotenoids, chlorophyll, chlorophyllin, fiber,
flavanoids, anthocyanins, cyaniding, delphinidin, malvidin,
pelargonidin, peonidin, petunidin, flavanols, catechin,
epicatechin, epigallocatechin, epigallocatechingallate,
theaflavins, thearubigins, proanthocyanins, flavonols, quercetin,
kaempferol, myricetin, isorhamnetin, flavononeshesperetin,
naringenin, eriodictyol, tangeretin, flavones, apigenin, luteolin,
lignans, phytoestrogens, resveratrol, isoflavones, daidzein,
genistein, glycitein, soy isoflavones, and combinations
thereof.
Mouth Moistening Ingredients
[0319] Mouth moisteners can include, but are not limited to, saliva
stimulators such as acids and salts and combinations thereof. In
some embodiments, acids can include acetic acid, adipic acid,
ascorbic acid, butyric acid, citric acid, formic acid, fumaric
acid, glyconic acid, lactic acid, phosphoric acid, malic acid,
oxalic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid and combinations
thereof.
[0320] Mouth moisteners can also include hydrocolloid materials
that hydrate and may adhere to oral surface to provide a sensation
of mouth moistening. Hydrocolloid materials can include naturally
occurring materials such as plant exudates, seed gums, and seaweed
extracts or they can be chemically modified materials such as
cellulose, starch, or natural gum derivatives. In some embodiments,
hydrocolloid materials can include pectin, gum arabic, acacia gum,
alginates, agar, carageenans, guar gum, xanthan gum, locust bean
gum, gelatin, gellan gum, galactomannans, tragacanth gum, karaya
gum, curdlan, konjac, chitosan, xyloglucan, beta glucan,
furcellaran, gum ghatti, tamarin, bacterial gums, and combinations
thereof. Additionally, in some embodiments, modified natural gums
such as propylene glycol alginate, carboxymethyl locust bean gum,
low methoxyl pectin, and their combinations can be included. In
some embodiments, modified celluloses can be included such as
microcrystalline cellulose, carboxymethlcellulose (CMC),
methylcellulose (MC), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPCM), and
hydroxypropylcellulose (MPC), and combinations thereof.
[0321] Similarly, humectants which can provide a perception of
mouth hydration can be included. Such humectants can include, but
are not limited to glycerol, sorbitol, polyethylene glycol,
erythritol, and xylitol. Additionally, in some embodiments, fats
can provide a perception of mouth moistening. Such fats can include
medium chain triglycerides, vegetable oils, fish oils, mineral
oils, and combinations thereof.
Throat Care Ingredients
[0322] Throat soothing ingredients can include analgesics,
anesthetics, demulcents, antiseptic, and combinations thereof. In
some embodiments, analgesics/anesthetics can include menthol,
phenol, hexylresorcinol, benzocaine, dyclonine hydrochloride,
benzyl alcohol, salicyl alcohol, and combinations thereof. In some
embodiments, demulcents can include but are not limited to slippery
elm bark, pectin, gelatin, and combinations thereof. In some
embodiments, antiseptic ingredients can include cetylpyridinium
chloride, domiphen bromide, dequalinium chloride, and combinations
thereof.
[0323] In some embodiments, antitussive ingredients such as
chlophedianol hydrochloride, codeine, codeine phosphate, codeine
sulfate, dextromethorphan, dextromethorphan hydrobromide,
diphenhydramine citrate, and diphenhydramine hydrochloride, and
combinations thereof can be included.
[0324] In some embodiments, throat soothing agents such as honey,
propolis, aloe vera, glycerine, menthol and combinations thereof
can be included. In still other. embodiments, cough suppressants
can be included. Such cough suppressants can fall into two groups:
those that alter the consistency or production of phlegm such as
mucolytics and expectorants; and those that suppress the coughing
reflex such as codeine (narcotic cough suppressants),
antihistamines, dextromethorphan and isoproterenol (non-narcotic
cough suppressants). In some embodiments, ingredients from either
or both groups can be included.
[0325] In still other embodiments, antitussives can include, but
are not limited to, the group consisting of codeine,
dextromethorphan, dextrorphan, diphenhydramine, hydrocodone,
noscapine, oxycodone, pentoxyverine and combinations thereof. In
some embodiments, antihistamines can include, but are not limited
to, acrivastine, azatadine, brompheniramine, chlorpheniramine,
clemastine, cyproheptadine, dexbrompheniramine, dimenhydrinate,
diphenhydramine, doxylamine, hydroxyzine, meclizine, phenindamine,
phenyltoloxamine, promethazine, pyrilamine, tripelennamine,
triprolidine and combinations thereof. In some embodiments,
non-sedating antihistamines can include, but are not limited to,
astemizole, cetirizine, ebastine, fexofenadine, loratidine,
terfenadine, and combinations thereof.
[0326] In some embodiments, expectorants can include, but are not
limited to, ammonium chloride, guaifenesin, ipecac fluid extract,
potassium iodide and combinations thereof. In some embodiments,
mucolytics can include, but are not limited to, acetylcycsteine,
ambroxol, bromhexine and combinations thereof. In some embodiments,
analgesic, antipyretic and anti-inflammatory agents can include,
but are not limited to, acetaminophen, aspirin, diclofenac,
diflunisal, etodolac, fenoprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen,
ketoprofen, ketorolac, nabumetone, naproxen, piroxicam, caffeine
and mixtures thereof. In some embodiments, local anesthetics can
include, but are not limited to, lidocaine, benzocaine, phenol,
dyclonine, benzonotate and mixtures thereof.
[0327] In some embodiments nasal decongestants and ingredients that
provide the perception of nasal clearing can be included. In some
embodiments, nasal decongestants can include but are not limited to
phenylpropanolamine, pseudoephedrine, ephedrine, phenylephrine,
oxymetazoline, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments
ingredients that provide a perception of nasal clearing can include
but are not limited to menthol, camphor, bomeol, ephedrine,
eucalyptus oil, peppermint oil, methyl salicylate, bornyl acetate,
lavender oil, wasabi extracts, horseradish extracts, and
combinations thereof. In some embodiments, a perception of nasal
clearing can be provided by odoriferous essential oils, extracts
from woods, gums, flowers and other botanicals, resins, animal
secretions, and synthetic aromatic materials.
[0328] In some embodiments, one or more colors can be included. As
classified by the United States Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21
C.F.R. 73), colors can include exempt from certification colors
(sometimes referred to as natural even though they can be
synthetically manufactured) and certified colors (sometimes
referred to as artificial), or combinations thereof. In some
embodiments, exempt from certification or natural colors can
include, but are not limited to annatto extract, (E160b), bixin,
norbixin, astaxanthin, dehydrated beets (beet powder), beetroot
red/betanin (E162), ultramarine blue, canthaxanthin (E161g),
cryptoxanthin (E161c), rubixanthin (E161d), violanxanthin (E161e),
rhodoxanthin (E161f), caramel (E150(a-d)), .beta.-apo-8'-carotenal
(E160e), .beta.-carotene (E160a), alpha carotene, gamma carotene,
ethyl ester of beta-apo-8 carotenal (E160f), flavoxanthin (E161a),
lutein (E161b), cochineal extract (E120); carmine (E132),
carmoisine/azorubine (E122), sodium copper chlorophyllin (E141),
chlorophyll (E140), toasted partially defatted cooked cottonseed
flour, ferrous gluconate, ferrous lactate, grape color extract,
grape skin extract (enocianina), anthocyanins (E163), haematococcus
algae meal, synthetic iron oxide, iron oxides and hydroxides
(E172), fruit juice, vegetable juice, dried algae meal, tagetes
(Aztec marigold) meal and extract, carrot oil, corn endosperm oil,
paprika, paprika oleoresin, phaffia yeast, riboflavin (E101),
saffron, titanium dioxide, turmeric (E100), turmeric oleoresin,
amaranth (E123), capsanthin/capsorbin (E160c), lycopene (E160d),
and combinations thereof.
[0329] In some embodiments, certified colors can include, but are
not limited to, FD&C blue #1, FD&C blue #2, FD&C green
#3, FD&C red #3, FD&C red #40, FD&C yellow #5 and
FD&C yellow #6, tartrazine (E102), quinoline yellow (E104),
sunset yellow (E110), ponceau (E124), erythrosine (E127), patent
blue V (E131), titanium dioxide (E171), aluminium (E173), silver
(E174), gold (E175), pigment rubine/lithol rubine BK (E180),
calcium carbonate (E170), carbon black (E153), black PN/brilliant
black BN (E151), green S/acid brilliant green BS (E142), and
combinations thereof. In some embodiments, certified colors can
include FD&C aluminum lakes. These consist of the aluminum
salts of FD&C dyes extended on an insoluble substrate of
alumina hydrate. Additionally, in some embodiments, certified
colors can be included as calcium salts.
Multiple Ingredients
[0330] In some embodiments, a delivery system or chewing gum may
include two or more ingredients for which managed release from the
chewing gum during consumption of the chewing gum is desired. In
some embodiments, the ingredients may be encapsulated or otherwise
included separately in different delivery systems. Alternatively,
in some embodiments the ingredients may be encapsulated or
otherwise included in the same delivery system. As another
possibility, one or more of the ingredients may be free (e.g.,
unencapsulated) while one or more other ingredients may be
encapsulated.
[0331] A chewing gum may include a group of ingredients for which
managed release of the group during consumption of the chewing gum
is desired. Groups of two or more ingredients for which managed
release from a chewing gum during consumption of the chewing gum
may be desired include, but are not limited to: color and flavor,
multiple flavors, multiple colors, cooling agent and flavor,
warming agent and flavor, cooling agent and warming agent, cooling
agent and high intensity sweetener, warming agent and high
intensity sweetener, multiple cooling agents (e.g., WS-3 and WS-23,
WS-3 and menthyl succinate), menthol and one or more cooling
agents, menthol and one or more warming agents, multiple warming
agents, high intensity sweetener(s) and tooth whitening active(s),
high intensity sweetener(s) and breath freshening active(s), an
ingredient with some bitterness and a bitterness suppressor for the
ingredient, multiple high intensity sweeteners (e.g., ace-k and
aspartame), multiple tooth whitening actives (e.g., an abrasive
ingredient and an antimicrobial ingredient, a peroxide and a
nitrate, a warming agent and a polyol, a cooling agent and a
polyol, multiple polyols, a warming agent and micronutrient, a
cooling agent and a micronutrient, a warming agent and a mouth
moistening agent, a cooling agent and a mouth moistening agent, a
warming agent and a throat care agent, a cooling agent and a throat
care agent, a warming agent and a food acid, a cooling agent and
food acid, a warming agent and an emulsifier/surfactant, a cooling
agent and an emulsifier/surfactant, a warming agent and a color, a
cooling agent and a color, a warming agent and a flavor
potentiator, a cooling agent and a flavor potentiator, a warming
agent with sweetness potentiator, a cooling agent with a sweetness
potentiator, a warming agent and an appetite suppressant, a cooling
agent and an appetite suppressant, a high intensity sweetener and a
flavor, a cooling agent and a teeth whitening agent, a warming
agent and a teeth whitening agent, a warming agent and breath
freshening agent, a cooling agent and a breath freshening agent, a
cooling agent and an effervescing system, a warming agent and an
effervescing system, a warming agent and an antimicrobial agent, a
cooling agent and an antimicrobial agent, multiple anticalculus
ingredients, multiple remineralization ingredients, multiple
surfactants, remineralization ingredients with demineralization
ingredients, acidic ingredients with acid buffering ingredients,
anticalculus ingredients with antibacterial ingredients,
remineralization ingredients with anticalculus ingredients,
anticalculus ingredients with remineralization ingredients with
antibacterial ingredients, surfactant ingredients with anticalculus
ingredients, surfactant ingredients with antibacterial ingredients,
surfactant ingredients with remineralization ingredients,
surfactants with anticalculus ingredients with antibacterial
ingredients, multiple types of vitamins or minerals, multiple
micronutrients, multiple acids, multiple antimicrobial ingredients,
multiple breath freshening ingredients, breath freshening
ingredients and antimicrobial ingredients, multiple appetite
suppressors, acids and bases that react to effervesce, a bitter
compound with a high intensity sweetener, a cooling agent and an
appetite suppressant, a warming agent and an appetite suppressant,
a high intensity sweetener and an appetite suppressant, a high
intensity sweetener with an acid, a probiotic ingredient and a
prebiotic ingredient, a vitamin and a mineral, a metabolic
enhancement ingredient with a macronutrient, a metabolic
enhancement ingredient with a micronutrient, an enzyme with a
substrate, a high intensity sweetener with a sweetness potentiator,
a cooling compound with a cooling potentiator, a flavor with a
flavor potentiator, a warming compound with a warming potentiator,
a flavor with salt, a high intensity sweetener with salt, an acid
with salt, a cooling compound with salt, a warming compound with
salt, a flavor with a surfactant, an astringent compound with an
ingredient to provide a sensation of hydration, etc. In some
embodiments, the multiple ingredients may be part of the same
delivery system or may be part of different delivery systems.
Different delivery systems may use the same or different
encapsulating materials.
[0332] Typically, encapsulation of the multiple ingredients will
result in a delay in the release of the predominant amount of the
multiple ingredients during consumption of a chewing gum that
includes the encapsulated multiple ingredients (e.g., as part of a
delivery system added as an ingredient to the chewing gum). This
may be particularly helpful in situations wherein separate
encapsulation of the ingredients may cause them to release with
different release profiles. For example, different high intensity
sweeteners may have different release profiles because they have
different water solubilities or differences in other
characteristics. Encapsulating them together may cause them to
release more simultaneously.
[0333] In some embodiments, the release profile of the multiple
ingredients can be managed for a gum by managing various
characteristics of the multiple ingredients, the delivery system
containing the multiple ingredients, and/or the chewing gum
containing the delivery system and/or how the delivery system is
made in a manner as previously discussed above.
[0334] The features and advantages of the present invention are
more fully shown by the following examples which are provided for
purposes of illustration, and are not to be construed as limiting
the invention in any way.
EXAMPLES
Examples 1-78
[0335] The following examples 1-78 include a variety of modified
release components, which may be selected for use in creating the
dualities discussed herein. These components may be used in any
region of the center-fill gum compositions. For instance, Example 2
provides encapsulated xylitol. The encapsulated sweetener xylitol
of Example 2 could be added to one region of a center-fill gum and
a sour agent, such as an acid, could be added to another region of
the gum to create a flavor duality based on distinct tastants. The
encapsulated adipic acid of Example 4 could also be employed.
[0336] Moreover, any of the encapsulated components provided in
Examples 1-78 could be selected and combined with an encapsulated
and/or unencapsulated component that is distinct from,
complementary to or different in intensity from the exemplary
component. For example, the encapsulated WS-3 (cooling agent) of
Example 12 could be added to one region of a center-fill gum and an
encapsulated and/or unencapsulated tingling agent could be added to
another region of the gum to create a duality based on distinct
sensates. Alternatively, the encapsulated WS-3 of Example 12 could
be added to one region of a center-fill gum and encapsulated and/or
unencapsulated menthol (another cooling agent) could be added to
another region to create a duality based on complementary
components. In another embodiment, a first portion of the
encapsulated WS-3 of Example 12 could be added to one region of a
center-fill gum and another portion of WS-3, which is different in
intensity could be added to another region of the gum. The second
portion of WS-3 could be encapsulated and/or unencapsulated.
[0337] A variety of other combinations using the modified release
components set forth in Examples 1-78 may be employed, such as
other distinct dualities, complementary dualities or dualities
between different intensities of the same encapsulated
component.
[0338] To exemplify the use of the modified release components of
Examples 1-78 in multi-modality gum compositions, Examples 79-95
incorporate a number of these components into different regions of
a center-fill gum in combination with other components that create
dual perceptions. More specifically, Examples 79-92 provide
center-fill gum compositions having solid center regions. The
center-fill gum compositions incorporate a number of the
encapsulated components of Examples 1-78 to provide different
dualities. Examples 93-96 provide center-fill gum compositions
having liquid center regions. These gum compositions also
incorporate a number of the encapsulated components of Examples
1-78 to provide different dualities.
Ingredient Examples
Ingredient Examples of Single Ingredients in a Delivery System.
TABLE-US-00003 [0339] EXAMPLE 1 Encapsulation of Glycyrrhizin -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Glycyrrhizin 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C.
in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Glycyrrhizin is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated Glycyrrhizin matrix is stored in air tight containers
with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00004 EXAMPLE 2 Encapsulation of Xylitol - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Xylitol 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Xylitol is then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated xylitol matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00005 EXAMPLE 3 Encapsulation of Erythritol Composition:
Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Erythritol 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Erythritol are then added to the resulting mixture and
mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The erythritol encapsulation matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00006 EXAMPLE 4 Encapsulation of Adipic acid - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 60.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Adipic acid 35.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Adipic acid is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated adipic acid matrix
is stored in air tight containers with low humidity below
35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00007 EXAMPLE 5 Encapsulation of Citric Acid - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Citric Acid 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Citric acid is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated citric acid matrix
is stored in air tight containers with low humidity below
35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00008 EXAMPLE 6 Encapsulation of Malic acid - Polyvinyl
acetate. Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Malic
acid 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at
a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Malic acid are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The malic acid encapsulation matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00009 EXAMPLE 7 Encapsulation of Spray dried peppermint
flavor - Polyvinyl acetate Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Spray dried peppermint flavor 20.00% Total
100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of
about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single
or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Spray dried peppermint flavor is then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated peppermint flavor in Polyvinyl
acetate matrix is stored in air tight containers with low humidity
below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00010 EXAMPLE 8 Encapsulation of Spray dried strawberry
flavor - Polyvinyl acetate Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Spray dried strawberry flavor 40.00% Total
100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of
about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single
or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Spray dried strawberry flavor is then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated strawberry flavor is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00011 EXAMPLE 9 Encapsulation of Monosodium Glutamate
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Monosodium
glutamate 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Monosodium glutamate is then
added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to
completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer
melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a
particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation matrix is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00012 EXAMPLE 10 Encapsulation of Salt - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
60.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodium
chloride 35.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Sodium chloride is then
added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to
completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer
melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a
particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00013 EXAMPLE 11 Encapsulation of Sodium acid sulfate -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Sodium acid sulfate 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Sodium acid sulfate is then added to the resulting mixture
and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients.
The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00014 EXAMPLE 12 Encapsulation of WS-3 in Polyvinyl
acetate. Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Cooling
sensate WS-3 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. WS-3 is then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting encapsulation is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The malic acid encapsulation matrix is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00015 EXAMPLE 13 Encapsulation of WS-23 - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Cooling sensate WS-23 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high
shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or
Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are
then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. WS-23 is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00016 EXAMPLE 14 Encapsulation of menthol - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Menthol 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Menthol crystals is then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and ground to
produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than 420
microns. The encapsulated menthol matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00017 EXAMPLE 15 Encapsulation of Caffeine - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Caffeine 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Caffeine is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated caffeine matrix is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00018 EXAMPLE 16 Encapsulation of Ascorbic Acid -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Ascorbic Acid 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C.
in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Ascorbic Acid is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated Ascorbic Acid matrix is stored in air tight containers
with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00019 EXAMPLE 17 Encapsulation of Calcium Lactate -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Calcium Lactate 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C.
in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Calcium Lactate is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated Calcium Lactate matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00020 EXAMPLE 18 Encapsulation of Zinc Citrate - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Zinc Citrate 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Zinc Citrate is then added
to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated Zinc Citrate matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00021 EXAMPLE 19 Encapsulation of Niacin - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Niacin 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Niacin is then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and ground to
produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than 420
microns. The encapsulated Niacin matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00022 EXAMPLE 20 Encapsulation of Pyridoxine - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Pyridoxine 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Pyridoxine is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated Pyridoxine matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00023 EXAMPLE 21 Encapsulation of Thiamine - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Thiamine 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Thiamine is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated Thiamine matrix is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00024 EXAMPLE 22 Encapsulation of Riboflavin - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Riboflavin 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Riboflavin is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated Riboflavin matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00025 EXAMPLE 23 Encapsulation of Sucralose - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix (Sucralose 20%). Composition: Ingredient Weight
percent Polyvinyl Acetate 77.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.00% Sucralose
20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 85.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil is added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Sucralose is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 590 microns. The
encapsulated sucralose matrix is stored in air tight containers
with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00026 EXAMPLE 24 Multiple encapsulation of
sucralose/polyvinyl acetate matrix (from example 23). Composition:
Ingredient Grams Center Cores Sucralose/Polymer Matrix (from
Example 23) 700.0 Coating Solution Purified Water 1168.0 Gum Arabic
293.0 Total Coating solution 1461.0 Procedure: Wurster process is
used to encapsulate Sucralose/Polymer Matrix. Coating solution
using the above mentioned recipe is prepared by stirring water and
gum at 35.degree. C. for 2 hrs. 700 gms of Sucralose//Polymer
Matrix are suspended in a fluidizing air stream which provide
generally cyclic flow in front of a spray nozzle. The spray nozzle
sprays an atomized flow of 1461 gms of the coating solution for 115
minutes. The coated particles are then dried in the fluidized
chamber for 50 minutes and stored below 35.degree. C. under dry
conditions.
TABLE-US-00027 EXAMPLE 25 A High Tensile strength encapsulation of
Aspartame - Polyvinyl acetate matrix (Aspartame 30%). Particle size
less than 420 microns. Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Aspartame is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
high tensile strength/low fat content encapsulation is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns.
TABLE-US-00028 EXAMPLE 25 B Low Tensile Strength encapsulation of
Aspartame - Polyvinyl acetate matrix (Aspartame 30%) Composition:
Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 50.00% Hydrogenated Oil
10.00% Glycerol Monostearate 10.00% Aspartame 30.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Aspartame is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting low Tensile Strength encapsulation is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns.
TABLE-US-00029 EXAMPLE 25 C High Tensile strength encapsulation of
Aspartame - Polyvinyl acetate matrix (Aspartame 30%). Particle size
less than 177 microns. Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Aspartame is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
high tensile strength/low fat content encapsulation is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 177 microns.
TABLE-US-00030 EXAMPLE 26 Encapsulation of AceK - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix (AceK 30%) Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
AceK 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at
a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. AceK is then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated AceK matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00031 EXAMPLE 27 Encapsulation of Neotame - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix (Neotame 10%) Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00% Hydrogenated Oil 10.00% Glycerol
Monostearate 5.00% Neotame 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 80.degree. C.
in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Neotame is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high
shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled
polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material
with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated
Neotame polymer encapsulation particles are stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00032 EXAMPLE 28 Encapsulation of Pectin in Polyvinyl
acetate matrix (Pectin 30%) Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Pectin 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high
shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or
Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are
then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Pectin is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated pectin polymer
encapsulation particles are stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
Ingredient Examples of Multiple Ingredients in a Delivery
System.
TABLE-US-00033 [0340] EXAMPLE 29 Encapsulation of Aspartame, Ace-K,
and Sucralose Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Aspartame 20.00% AceK 10.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Aspartame, Ace-K, and Sucralose are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated sweeteners are stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00034 EXAMPLE 30 Encapsulation of Aspartame, Ace-K, and
Glycyrrhizin Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Aspartame 20.00% Ace-K 10.00% Glycyrrhizin 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Aspartame, Ace-K, and Glycyrrhizin are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated sweeteners are stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00035 EXAMPLE 31 Encapsulation of Aspartame, Ace-K, and
Menthol Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame
20.00% Ace-K 10.00% Menthol 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Aspartame, Ace-K, and Menthol are then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated sweeteners are stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00036 EXAMPLE 32 Encapsulation of Aspartame, Ace-K, and
Adipic Acid Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Aspartame 10.00% Ace-K 5.00% Adipic acid 25.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Aspartame, Ace-K, and Adipic Acid are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated sweeteners are stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00037 EXAMPLE 33 Encapsulation of Adipic, Citric, and
Malic Acid Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Adipic
Acid 10.00% Citric Acid 20.00% Malic Acid 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Adipic, Citric, and Malic Acid are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulated acids are stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00038 EXAMPLE 34 Encapsulation of Sucralose, and Citric
Acid Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sucralose
10.00% Citric Acid 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a
high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma
or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate
are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Sucralose and
Citric Acid are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulation is stored in air tight containers with low humidity
below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00039 EXAMPLE 35 Encapsulation of Sucralose and Adipic
Acid Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sucralose
10.00% Adipic Acid 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high
shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or
Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are
then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Sucralose and Adipic
Acid are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high
shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled
polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material
with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00040 EXAMPLE 36 Encapsulation of Aspartame and Salt
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 20.00%
Salt 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at
a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and Salt are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00041 EXAMPLE 37 Encapsulation of Aspartame with WS-3
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 20.00%
WS-3 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at
a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and WS-3 are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00042 EXAMPLE 38 Encapsulation of Sucralose with WS-23
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sucralose 10.00%
WS-23 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Sucralose and WS-23 are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00043 EXAMPLE 39 Encapsulation of Sucralose and Menthol
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 70.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sucralose 10.00%
Menthol 15.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Sucralose and Menthol are then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00044 EXAMPLE 40 Encapsulation of Aspartame and Neotame
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 60.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 30.00%
Neotame 5.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and Neotame are then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting encapsulation is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulation matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00045 EXAMPLE 41 Encapsulation of Aspartame and Adenosine
monophosphate (bitterness inhibitor) Composition: Ingredient Weight
percent Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 20.00% Adenosine monophosphate (AMP)
10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and AMP are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00046 EXAMPLE 42 Encapsulation of Aspartame and Caffeine
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 60.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 20.00%
Caffeine 15.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and Caffeine are
then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to
completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00047 EXAMPLE 43 Encapsulation of sucralose and Calcium
Lactate Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% sucralose
10.00% Calcium Lactate 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high
shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or
Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are
then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and Calcium
Lactate are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material
with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00048 EXAMPLE 44 Encapsulation of Sucralose and Vitamin C
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sucralose 10.00%
Ascorbic Acid (Vitamin C) 20.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high
shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or
Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are
then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Sucralose and Ascorbic
Acid is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high
shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer
melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a
particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored
in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00049 EXAMPLE 45 Encapsulation of Aspartame and Niacin
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 15.00%
Niacin 15.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and Niacin are then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00050 EXAMPLE 46 Encapsulation of sucralose and Folic Acid
Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 75.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sucralose 10.00%
Folic Acid 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is
melted at a temperature of about 90.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Sucralose and Folic Acid are
then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to
completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulation is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00051 EXAMPLE 47 Encapsulation of mixed Aspartame and AceK
- Polyvinyl acetate matrix (Actives = 30%) Composition: Ingredient
Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75%
Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 21.00% AceK 9.00% Total
100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of
about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single
or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Aspartame and AceK (60/40) are then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The mixed Aspartame and AceK encapsulation matrix is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00052 EXAMPLE 48 Encapsulation of mixed WS-3 and WS-23 -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix. Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Cooling sensate WS-3 15.00% Cooling sensate
WS-23 15.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted
at a temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such
as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. WS-3 and WS-23 are then added to the
resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse
the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and
ground to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less
than 420 microns. The mixed WS-3 and WS-23 encapsulation matrix is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00053 EXAMPLE 49 Encapsulation of mixed Aspartame and
Calciumcarbonate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix. Composition:
Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 60.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 20.00% Calciumcarbonate
15.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Aspartame and calcium carbonate are then
added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to
completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer
melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a
particle size of less than 420 microns. The mixed aspartame and
calcium carbonate encapsulation matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00054 EXAMPLE 50 Encapsulation of mixed Aspartame and Talc
- Polyvinyl acetate matrix. Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 60.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Aspartame 20.00% Talc 15.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Aspartame and talc are then added to the resulting mixture
and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients.
The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The mixed aspartame and talc encapsulation matrix is stored in air
tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
Ingredient Examples of Single Oral Care Ingredients in a Delivery
System.
TABLE-US-00055 [0341] EXAMPLE 51 Encapsulation of Sodium
tripolyphosphate (Sodiumtripolyphosphate) - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a
high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma
or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate
are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Sodiumtripolyphosphate is then added to the resulting mixture and
mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00056 EXAMPLE 52 Encapsulation of Sodium Fluoride (NaF) -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Sodium Fluoride 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. NaF is
then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to
completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer
melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a
particle size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is
stored in air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree.
C.
TABLE-US-00057 EXAMPLE 53 Encapsulation of Calcium peroxide -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Calcium Peroxide 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 80.degree. C.
in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Calcium peroxide is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00058 EXAMPLE 54 Encapsulation of Zinc Chloride -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 65.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Zinc Chloride 30.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. zinc
chloride is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00059 EXAMPLE 55 Encapsulation of Carbamide peroxide -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Carbamide Peroxide 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Carbamide peroxide is then added to the resulting mixture
and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients.
The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00060 EXAMPLE 56 Encapsulation of Potassium Nitrate (KNO3)
- Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Potassium Nitrate 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. KNO3 is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00061 EXAMPLE 57 Encapsulation of Chlorhexidine -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Chlorhexidine 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 80.degree. C.
in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Chlorhexidine is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00062 EXAMPLE 58 Encapsulation of sodium stearate -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Sodium stearate 40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Sodium
stearate is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00063 EXAMPLE 59 Encapsulation of Sodium Bicarbonate -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Sodium Bicarbonate 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. NaHCO3 is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00064 EXAMPLE 60 Encapsulation of Cetylpridinium chloride
(CPC) - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight
percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Cetylpridinium chloride 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. CPC is then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00065 EXAMPLE 61 Encapsulation of Calcium Casein
Peptone-Calcium Phosphate CCP-CP (Recaldent) - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Recaldent
40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Recaldent is then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00066 EXAMPLE 62 Encapsulation of sodium Ricinoleate -
Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent
Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol
Monostearate 1.25% Sodium Ricinoleate 40.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Sodium ricinoleate is then added to the resulting mixture
and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients.
The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00067 EXAMPLE 63 Encapsulation of sodium hexametaphosphate
(Sodiumhexamataphosphate) - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodium Hexametaphosphate 40.00%
Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Sodiumhexamataphosphate is then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00068 EXAMPLE 64 Encapsulation of Urea - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix Composition: Ingredient Weight percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Urea
40.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Urea is then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
Ingredient Examples of Multiple Oral Care Ingredients in a Delivery
System.
TABLE-US-00069 [0342] EXAMPLE 65 Encapsulation of
Sodiumtripolyphosphate (STP) and sodium stearate - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix. Composition: Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 20.00% Sodium stearate 10.00% Sucralose
10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00070 EXAMPLE 66 Encapsulation of Sodium Fluoride and
Sodiumtripolyphosphate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 57.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodiumtripolyphosphate 25.00%
Sodium Fluoride 3.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed under
high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The resulting
filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a powdered
material with a particle size of less than 420 microns. The
encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00071 EXAMPLE 67 Encapsulation of Calcium peroxide and
Sodiumhexamataphosphate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Calcium Peroxide 7.00%
Sodiumhexamataphosphate 23.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00072 EXAMPLE 68 Encapsulation of Zinc Chloride and
Sodiumtripolyphosphate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Zinc Chloride 4.00%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 26.00% Aspartame 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00073 EXAMPLE 69 Encapsulation of Carbamide peroxide and
Sodiumtripolyphosphate in Polyvinylacetate encapsulation.
Composition: Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 20.00% Carbamide Peroxide 10.00% Sucralose
10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00074 EXAMPLE 70 Encapsulation of Potassium Nitrate (KNO3)
and Sodiumtripolyphosphate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Potassium Nitrate 10.00%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 20.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00075 EXAMPLE 71 Encapsulation of Chlorhexidine,
Sodiumtripolyphosphate and Sodium Fluoride - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix Composition: Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Chlorhexidine 4.00% Sodiumtripolyphosphate 23.00% Sodium Fluoride
3.00% Aspartame 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate
is melted at a temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Actives are then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00076 EXAMPLE 72 Encapsulation of sodium stearate,
Sodiumtripolyphosphate and Menthol-Polyvinyl acetate matrix
Composition: Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00%
Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodium stearate
4.00% Sodiumtripolyphosphate 19.00% Menthol 7.00% Sucralose 10.00%
Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a
temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as
extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The
hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then added to the
molten polyvinyl acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting
mixture and mixed under high shear to completely disperse the
ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground
to produce a powdered material with a particle size of less than
420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight
containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00077 EXAMPLE 73 Encapsulation of Sodium Bicarbonate,
Sodiumtripolyphosphate and Sodium stearate - Polyvinyl acetate
matrix Composition: Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate
55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodium
stearate 4.00% Sodiumtripolyphosphate 19.00% Sodium bicarbonate
7.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate
is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree. C. in a high shear
mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or Banbury
mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are then
added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Actives are then added to
the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00078 EXAMPLE 74 Encapsulation of Cetylpridinium chloride
(CPC), Sodium Fluoride and Sodiumtripolyphosphate - Polyvinyl
acetate matrix Composition: Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl
Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil 3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25%
Cetylpridinium chloride 4.00% Sodiumtripolyphosphate 23.00% Sodium
Fluoride 3.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure: Polyvinyl
acetate is melted at a temperature of about 80.degree. C. in a high
shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or sigma or
Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol monostearate are
then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate. Actives are then added
to the resulting mixture and mixed under high shear to completely
disperse the ingredients. The resulting filled polymer melt is
cooled and ground to produce a powdered material with a particle
size of less than 420 microns. The encapsulated matrix is stored in
air tight containers with low humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00079 EXAMPLE 75 Encapsulation of Calcium Casein
Peptone-Calcium Phosphate CCP-CP (Recaldent) and
Sodiumtripolyphosphate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Recaldent 10.00%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 20.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00080 EXAMPLE 76 Encapsulation of sodium Ricinoleate and
Sodiumtripolyphosphate- Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodium Ricinoleate 4.00%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 26.00% Aspartame 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
110.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00081 EXAMPLE 77 Encapsulation of sodium hexametaphosphate
(SHMP) and Sodium Stearate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Sodium Hexametaphosphate 26.00%
Sodium stearate 4.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00% Procedure:
Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about 110.degree.
C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or twin screw) or
sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and Glycerol
monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl acetate.
Sodiumhexamataphosphate is then added to the resulting mixture and
mixed under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
TABLE-US-00082 EXAMPLE 78 Encapsulation of Urea and
Sodiumtripolyphosphate - Polyvinyl acetate matrix Composition:
Weight Ingredient percent Polyvinyl Acetate 55.00% Hydrogenated Oil
3.75% Glycerol Monostearate 1.25% Urea 10.00%
Sodiumtripolyphosphate 20.00% Sucralose 10.00% Total 100.00%
Procedure: Polyvinyl acetate is melted at a temperature of about
80.degree. C. in a high shear mixer such as extruder (single or
twin screw) or sigma or Banbury mixer. The hydrogenated oil and
Glycerol monostearate are then added to the molten polyvinyl
acetate. Actives are then added to the resulting mixture and mixed
under high shear to completely disperse the ingredients. The
resulting filled polymer melt is cooled and ground to produce a
powdered material with a particle size of less than 420 microns.
The encapsulated matrix is stored in air tight containers with low
humidity below 35.degree. C.
Examples 79-92
[0343] As mentioned above, Examples 79-92 provide multi-modality
gum compositions, which are center-fill gums having solid center
regions. Different types of dualities are exemplified in these
solid center-fill gum compositions. The multi-modality gum
compositions of Examples 79-92 incorporate a number of the
encapsulated components from Examples 1-78 to provide different
dualities in the compositions.
Examples of Multi-Modality Gums with Solid Center-Fills
Cooling in Gum Portion and Warming in Gelatin Bead Center
TABLE-US-00083 [0344] EXAMPLE 79 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Encapsulated Menthol Gum Base 39.00
Sorbitol 43.18 Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin
0.20 Aspartame 0.30 AceK 0.15 Encapsulated Menthol (from Example
14) 3.00 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following
manner: The gum base is melted in a mixer. The remaining
ingredients are added to the molten gum base. The melted gum base
with ingredients are mixed to completely disperse the ingredients.
The thoroughly mixed gum is then introduced into a feeder for a
nozzle other than the innermost nozzle of a multiple nozzle
extruder. Gelatin bead center fill composition with warming Capsule
Film Material: Gelatin 15.00 Water 80.00 Glycerin 5.00 Total 100.00
Capsule Filler Material: Flavor 35.00 Vegetable Oil 35.00 Sugar
29.95 Capsaicin 0.05 Total 100.00 Procedure: As described in U.S.
Pat. No. 4,426,337, gelatin beads can be prepared by mixing the
capsule-film solution in one tank and mixing the capsule filler
material in a second tank. Using equipment with concentrically
aligned coaxial conduits, the capsule-film material is fed through
an outer conduit while the capsule filler material is fed through
the center conduit and both conduits feed the materials into a
cooling liquid where the final capsules are formed. The conduit
flow rates are configured to create a finished capsule with 80%
filler material and 20% capsule film material. The gelatin beads
are introduced into the center region of the chewing gum by feeding
them through the innermost nozzle of a multiple extruder. The beads
are metered through the nozzle to provide a finished product with
20% center fill material.
Warming in Gum Portion and Cooling in Gelatin Bead Center
TABLE-US-00084 [0345] EXAMPLE 80 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Capsaicin Gum Base 39.00 Sorbitol 46.08
Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame
0.30 AceK 0.15 Capsaicin 0.10 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is
prepared in the following manner: The gum base is melted in a
mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the molten gum base.
The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to completely
disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is then
introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Gelatin bead center fill
composition with menthol Capsule Film Material: Gelatin 15.00 Water
80.00 Glycerin 5.00 Total 100.00 Capsule Filler Material: Flavor
35.00 Vegetable Oil 35.00 Sugar 29.40 Menthol 0.60 Total 100.00
Procedure: As described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,426,337, gelatin beads
can be prepared by mixing the capsule-film solution in one tank and
mixing the capsule filler material in a second tank. Using
equipment with concentrically aligned coaxial conduits, the
capsule-film material is fed through an outer conduit while the
capsule filler material is fed through the center conduit and both
conduits feed the materials into a cooling liquid where the final
capsules are formed. The conduit flow rates are configured to
create a finished capsule with 80% filler material and 20% capsule
film material. The gelatin beads are introduced into the center
region of the chewing gum by feeding them through the innermost
nozzle of a multiple extruder. The beads are metered through the
nozzle to provide a finished product with 20% center fill
material.
Spice Flavor in Chewing Gum Portion and Indulgent Flavor in Milk
Chocolate Center
TABLE-US-00085 [0346] EXAMPLE 81 Composition: Ingredient Weight
percent Cinnamon Chewing gum composition containing multiple
encapsulated Sucralose/polyvinyl acetate matrix (from example 24).
(Slowest release sucralose gum). Gum Base 36.00 Sorbitol 58.10
Glycerin 1.00 Cinnamon Flavor 1.90 Sucralose 0.15
Sucralose/polyvinyl acetate matrix 2.85 (from example 24) Total
100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following manner: The gum
base is melted in a mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to
the molten gum base. The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed
to completely disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is
then introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Milk Chocolate center Milk
Crumb: Cocoa liquor 13.50 Sugar 53.50 Milk solids 32.00 The milk
solids and sugar are kneaded together with the cocoa liquor such
that controlled crystallization can occur. The crumb is then dried
to the desired final moisture content. Drying can involve vacuum
drying alone or drying can occur in combination with drum driers.
Milk Chocolate: Milk crumb 84.40 Cocoa butter 15.00 Lecithin 0.50
Carmel Flavor 0.10 The ingredients are mixed in either a continuous
or batch system until thoroughly blended and then refined until a
desired consistency and particle size are reached. Refiners can
include a series of rollers that use shear forces to break up the
sugar and cocoa particles. The refined mass is then further
agitated in a conch. Lastly, the milk chocolate is tempered, molded
and cooled. The milk chocolate is introduced into the center region
of the chewing gum by feeding the milk chocolate through the
innermost nozzle of a multiple extruder. The milk chocolate is
metered through the nozzle to provide a finished product with 5%
center fill material.
Citrus Fruit Flavor in Chewing Gum Portion and Indulgent Flavor in
Milk Chocolate Center
TABLE-US-00086 [0347] EXAMPLE 82 Composition: Ingredient Weight
percent Citrus Fruit Chewing gum composition containing multiple
encapsulated Sucralose/polyvinyl acetate matrix (from example 24).
(Slowest release sucralose gum). Gum Base 36.00 Sorbitol 58.10
Glycerin 1.00 Orange Flavor 1.90 Sucralose 0.15 Sucralose/polyvinyl
acetate matrix 2.85 (from example 24) Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum
is prepared in the following manner: The gum base is melted in a
mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the molten gum base.
The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to completely
disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is then
introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Milk Chocolate center Milk
Crumb: Cocoa liquor 13.50 Sugar 53.50 Milk solids 32.00 The milk
solids and sugar are kneaded together with the cocoa liquor such
that controlled crystallization can occur. The crumb is then dried
to the desired final moisture content. Drying can involve vacuum
drying alone or drying can occur in combination with drum driers.
Milk Chocolate: Milk crumb 84.40 Cocoa butter 15.00 Lecithin 0.50
Carmel Flavor 0.10 The ingredients are mixed in either a continuous
or batch system until thoroughly blended and then refined until a
desired consistency and particle size are reached. Refiners can
include a series of rollers that use shear forces to break up the
sugar and cocoa particles. The refined mass is then further
agitated in a conch. Lastly, the milk chocolate is tempered, molded
and cooled. The milk chocolate is introduced into the center region
of the chewing gum by feeding the milk chocolate through the
innermost nozzle of a multiple extruder. The milk chocolate is
metered through the nozzle to provide a finished product with 5%
center fill material.
Fruit Flavor in Chewing Gum Portion and Fruit Flavor Potentiator in
Starch Jelly Center
TABLE-US-00087 [0348] EXAMPLE 83 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Encapsulated Citric Acid - Polyvinyl
acetate Matrix Gum Base 39.00 Sorbitol 42.18 Mannitol 9.00
Raspberry Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame 0.30
AceK 0.15 Encapsulated Citric Acid (from Example 5) 4.00 Total
100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following manner: The gum
base is melted in a mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to
the molten gum base. The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed
to completely disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is
then introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Starch Jelly Center with
Inosine Monophosphate (IMP) Sugar 18.84 Glucose syrup 23.34 Invert
syrup 4.50 Water 23.63 Thin boiling starch 6.04 Water 23.17 Citric
acid 0.02 IMP 0.46 Total 100.00 The sugar is dissolved in the first
quantity of water and mixed together with the glucose syrup and
invert sugar and brought to a boil. In a separate vessel, a starch
slurry is prepared by mixing the starch with the second quantity of
water (cold). The starch slurry is added to the boiling sugar
solution in a thin stream with mixing. The mixture is cooked until
it reaches 76-78% solids. The starch jelly is introduced into the
center of the chewing gum by feeding the mass through the inner
most nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Alternatively, the
starch jelly mass can be cast into starch and allowed to set up
prior to introducing into the chewing gum via the inner most nozzle
of a multiple nozzle extruder. The starch jelly is metered through
the inner most nozzle to provide a finished product with 8%
center.
First Fruit Flavor in Chewing Gum Portion and Second Complementary
Fruit Flavor in Chewy Nougat Center
TABLE-US-00088 [0349] EXAMPLE 84 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Encapsulated Citric Acid - Polyvinyl
acetate Matrix Gum Base 39.00 Sorbitol 42.18 Mannitol 9.00
Strawberry Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame 0.30
AceK 0.15 Encapsulated Citric Acid (from Example 5) 4.00 Total
100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following manner: The gum
base is melted in a mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to
the molten gum base. The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed
to completely disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is
then introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Chewy Nougat with Kiwi Flavor
Egg albumen 0.37 Water 3.13 Sugar 6.59 Water 2.00 Sugar 35.73
Glucose syrup 35.73 Water 14.65 Kiwi Flavor 1.80 Total 100.00 The
egg albumen is dissolved in the first quantity of water while the
first quantity of sugar is dissolved in the second quantity of
water. The egg albumen and sugar solution are mixed together and
aerated. In a separate vessel, the second quantity of sugar is
dissolved in the third quantity of water and the glucose syrup is
added with mixing. This sugar solution is then boiled to
141.degree. C. The boiled sugar solution is then added to the
whipped egg albumen/sugar solution in a thin stream. The chewy
nougat is introduced into the center of the chewing gum by feeding
the mass through the inner most nozzle of a multiple nozzle
extruder. Alternatively, the chewy nougat mass can be poured onto a
cooling table and cut prior to introducing into the chewing gum via
the inner most nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. The chewy
nougat is metered through the inner most nozzle to provide a
finished product with 25% center.
First Mint Flavor in Chewing Gum Portion and Second Mint Flavor of
a Different Variety in Dark Chocolate Center
TABLE-US-00089 [0350] EXAMPLE 85 Chewing gum composition containing
Encapsulated Spray Dried Peppermint Flavor Ingredient Weight
percent Gum Base 39.00 Sorbitol 40.18 Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67
Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame 0.30 AceK 0.15 Encapsulated
Spray Dried Peppermint 6.00 Flavor (from Example 7) Total 100.00
Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following manner: The gum base is
melted in a mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the
molten gum base. The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to
completely disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is
then introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Dark Chocolate center
Ingredient Weight percentage Sucrose 43.25 Cocoa mass 43.25 Cocoa
butter 12.30 Lecithin 0.50 Eucalyptus flavor 0.70 The ingredients
are mixed in either a continuous or batch system until thoroughly
blended and then refined until a desired consistency and particle
size are reached. Refiners can include a series of rollers that use
shear forces to break up the sugar and cocoa particles. The refined
mass is then further agitated in a conch. Lastly, the dark
chocolate is tempered, molded and cooled. The dark chocolate is
introduced into the center region of the chewing gum by feeding the
dark chocolate through the innermost nozzle of a multiple extruder.
The dark chocolate is metered through the nozzle to provide a
finished product with 5% center fill material.
First Mint Flavor in Chewing Gum Portion and Second Mint Flavor of
the Same Variety in Dark Chocolate Center
TABLE-US-00090 [0351] EXAMPLE 86 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Encapsulated Spray Dried Peppermint
Flavor Gum Base 39.00 Sorbitol 40.18 Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67
Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame 0.30 AceK 0.15 Encapsulated
Spray Dried Arvensis 6.00 Peppermint Flavor (as in Example 7 when
Arvensis peppermint flavor is used) Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is
prepared in the following manner: The gum base is melted in a
mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the molten gum base.
The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to completely
disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is then
introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Dark Chocolate center Sucrose
43.25 Cocoa mass 43.25 Cocoa butter 12.30 Lecithin 0.50 Crystal
white peppermint flavor 0.70 The ingredients are mixed in either a
continuous or batch system until thoroughly blended and then
refined until a desired consistency and particle size are reached.
Refiners can include a series of rollers that use shear forces to
break up the sugar and cocoa particles. The refined mass is then
further agitated in a conch. Lastly, the dark chocolate is
tempered, molded and cooled. The dark chocolate is introduced into
the center region of the chewing gum by feeding the dark chocolate
through the innermost nozzle of a multiple extruder. The dark
chocolate is metered through the nozzle to provide a finished
product with 5% center fill material.
Sweet Taste in Chewing Gum Portion and Sour Taste in Fondant
Center
TABLE-US-00091 [0352] EXAMPLE 87 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Encapsulated Glycyrrhizin Gum Base 39.00
Sorbitol 45.08 Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin
0.20 Aspartame 0.30 AceK 0.15 Encapsulated Glycyrrhizin (from
Example 1) 1.10 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the
following manner: The gum base is melted in a mixer. The remaining
ingredients are added to the molten gum base. The melted gum base
with ingredients are mixed to completely disperse the ingredients.
The thoroughly mixed gum is then introduced into a feeder for a
nozzle other than the innermost nozzle of a multiple nozzle
extruder. Fondant Center with Sour Taste Sugar 58.81 Glucose syrup
14.49 Water 25.00 Encapsulated acid blend (from Example 33) 1.20
Citric Acid 0.50 Total 100.00 The sugar and glucose syrup are added
to water and dissolved. The solution is boiled until it reaches
117.degree. C. or about 88% solids. The evaporated syrup is then
agitated while cooling to induce rapid crystallization. The
encapsulated acid blend and the citric acid are adding near the end
of the crystallization process. The fondant is introduced into the
center region of the chewing gum by feeding the fondant through the
innermost nozzle of a multiple extruder. The fondant is metered
through the nozzle to provide a finished product with 12% center
fill material.
Bitter Taste in Chewing Gum Portion and Astringent Taste in White
Chocolate Center
TABLE-US-00092 [0353] EXAMPLE 88 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing 15% Naringin (Bitter Taste) Grapefruit
Flavor Gum Base 39.00 Sugar 45.00 Corn Syrup 10.63 Grapefruit
Flavor with 15% naringin 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Total
100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following manner: The gum
base is melted in a mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to
the molten gum base. The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed
to completely disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is
then introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. White Chocolate center with
Quinine (Astringent Taste) Cocoa butter equivalent 26.45 Whole milk
powder 25.00 Sugar 48.00 Lecithin 0.50 Quinine 0.05 The ingredients
are mixed in either a continuous or batch system until thoroughly
blended and then refined until a desired consistency and particle
size are reached. Refiners can include a series of rollers that use
shear forces to break up the sugar and cocoa particles. The refined
mass is then further agitated in a conch. Lastly, the dark
chocolate is tempered, molded and cooled. The white chocolate is
introduced into the center region of the chewing gum by feeding the
white chocolate through the innermost nozzle of a multiple
extruder. The white chocolate is metered through the nozzle to
provide a finished product with 5% center fill material.
Breath Freshening in the Chewing Gum Portion and Whitening in the
Gasified Candy Center
TABLE-US-00093 [0354] EXAMPLE 89 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Encapsulated Zinc Citrate Gum Base 39.00
Sorbitol 42.18 Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin
0.20 Aspartame 0.30 AceK 0.15 Encapsulated Zinc Citrate (from
Example 18) 4.00 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the
following manner: The gum base is melted in a mixer. The remaining
ingredients are added to the molten gum base. The melted gum base
with ingredients are mixed to completely disperse the ingredients.
The thoroughly mixed gum is then introduced into a feeder for a
nozzle other than the innermost nozzle of a multiple nozzle
extruder. Gasified Candy with Sodium Stearate Isomalt 57.50
Sorbitol solution 37.50 Sodium stearate 5.00 Flavor and color to
taste As described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,289,794, the isomalt and
sorbitol solution are mixed together and cooked to a temperature of
about 280.degree. F. Additives including sodium stearate, flavor,
and color are then added. The cooked candy is gasified by
introducing carbon dioxide gas at superatmospheric temperature into
a closed vessel containing the cooked candy at 500-700 psi of
pressure. The mixture is stirred for two to six minutes to
incorporate the gas. The gasified candy is then allowed to solidify
in a cooling tube. Once solid, the pressure is released causing the
candy to fracture. The fractured, gasified candy can then be sized
and fed into the inner most nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder.
The gasified candy is introduced into the center region of the
chewing gum by feeding the gasified candy through the innermost
nozzle of a multiple extruder. The gasified candy is metered
through the nozzle to provide a finished product with 10% center
fill material.
Metabolism Modulation in Chewing Gum Portion and Stress Relief in
Sugar Free Chocolate Center
TABLE-US-00094 [0355] EXAMPLE 90 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Epigallocatechin Gallate (EGCG) Gum Base
39.50 Sorbitol 45.58 Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50
Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame 0.30 AceK 0.15 EGCG 0.10 Total 100.00
Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following manner: The gum base is
melted in a mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the
molten gum base. The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to
completely disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is
then introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Sugar Free Chocolate Center
with Theanine Crystalline maltitol 41.60 Cocoa mass 41.60 Cocoa
butter 12.30 Theanine 4.00 Lecithin 0.50 Total 100.00 The
ingredients are mixed in either a continuous or batch system until
thoroughly blended and then refined until a desired consistency and
particle size are reached. Refiners can include a series of rollers
that use shear forces to break up the sugar and cocoa particles.
The refined mass is then further agitated in a conch. Lastly, the
sugar free chocolate is tempered, molded and cooled. The sugar free
chocolate is introduced into the center region of the chewing gum
by feeding the sugar free chocolate through the innermost nozzle of
a multiple extruder. The sugar free chocolate is metered through
the nozzle to provide a finished product with 5% center fill
material.
Breath Freshening in the Chewing Gum Portion and Remineralization
in a Powdered Center with an Amorphous Isomalt Shell
TABLE-US-00095 [0356] EXAMPLE 91 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing Chlorophyll Gum Base 39.00 Sorbitol QS
Mannitol 9.00 Flavor 3.67 Glycerin 1.50 Lecithin 0.20 Aspartame
0.30 AceK 0.15 Chlorophyll 0.50 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is
prepared in the following manner: The gum base is melted in a
mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the molten gum base.
The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to completely
disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is then
introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Powdered Center with casein
phosphopeptide-amorphous calcium phosphate (CPP-ACP) Erythritol
70.00 Xylitol 20.00 CPP-ACP 10.00 The powders are dry blended using
any suitable means that creates a uniform mixture. The powder blend
is introduced into the center region of the chewing gum by feeding
the powder blend through the innermost nozzle of a multiple
extruder. The powder blend is metered through the nozzle to provide
a finished product with 5% center fill material. Amorphous Isomalt
Shell Isomalt 90.00 Water 10.00 The isomalt is melted by heating to
a temperature of 60-90.degree. C. and held until 3% or less
moisture remains. The cooked isomalt is then fed into the outermost
nozzle of multiple extruder. The cooked isomalt is metered through
the nozzle to provide a finished product with 60% shell.
Tingling Center Comprising Two Solids with Complementary Flavors in
Gum Portion and Exterior Coating
TABLE-US-00096 [0357] EXAMPLE 92 Kiwi Chewing gum composition
containing multiple encapsulated Sucralose/polyvinyl acetate matrix
(from example 24). (Slowest release sucralose gum). Composition:
Ingredient Weight percent Gum Base 36.00 Sorbitol 58.10 Glycerin
1.00 Kiwi Flavor 1.90 Sucralose 0.15 Sucralose/polyvinyl acetate
matrix (from example 24) 2.85 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is
prepared in the following manner: The gum base is melted in a
mixer. The remaining ingredients are added to the molten gum base.
The melted gum base with ingredients are mixed to completely
disperse the ingredients. The thoroughly mixed gum is then
introduced into a feeder for a nozzle other than the innermost
nozzle of a multiple nozzle extruder. Milk Chocolate with Gasified
Hard Candy center Ingredient Weight percentage Milk Crumb: Cocoa
liquor 13.50 Sugar 53.50 Milk solids 32.00 The milk solids and
sugar are kneaded together with the cocoa liquor such that
controlled crystallization can occur. The crumb is then dried to
the desired final moisture content. Drying can involve vacuum
drying alone or drying can occur in combination with drum driers.
Milk chocolate: Milk crumb 84.40 Cocoa butter 15.00 Lecithin 0.50
Carmel Flavor 0.10 The ingredients are mixed in either a continuous
or batch system until thoroughly blended and then refined until a
desired consistency and particle size are reached. Refiners can
include a series of rollers that use shear forces to break up the
sugar and cocoa particles. The refined mass is then further
agitated in a conch. Lastly, the milk chocolate is tempered, molded
and cooled. Gasified Candy with Tingling (Jambu Extract) Ingredient
Weight Percent Isomalt 59.99 Sorbitol Solution 40.00 Jambu extract
0.01 As described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,289,794, the isomalt and
sorbitol solution are mixed together and cooked to a temperature of
about 280.degree. F. Additives including the jambu extract are then
added. The cooked candy is gasified by introducing carbon dioxide
gas at superatmospheric temperature into a closed vessel containing
the cooked candy at 500-700 psi of pressure. The mixture is stirred
for two to six minutes to incorporate the gas. The gasified candy
is then allowed to solidify in a cooling tube. Once solid, the
pressure is released causing the candy to fracture. The fractured,
gasified candy can then be sized and fed into the inner most nozzle
of a multiple nozzle extruder along with the milk chocolate.
Alternatively, the fractured and sized gasified candy be fed into a
nozzle adjacent to the inner most nozzle as the chocolate is fed
into the inner most nozzle. This can minimize disruption to the
gasified candy. The inner most nozzle and the nozzle adjacent to
the inner most nozzle can be configured to created a center fill
comprising two solids where the center makes up 5% of the product.
Complementary Flavored Outer Coating Coating Composition with
Complementary Strawberry Flavor Component Weight Percent Maltitol
95.10 Bleached gum Arabic 3.32 Titanium dioxide 0.36 Strawberry
flavor 1.07 Intense sweetener 0.08 Color 0 Candelilla wax 0.08 Once
the center comprising milk chocolate and gasified hard candy and
the gum region are formed into individual pieces by the multi
nozzle extruder and sizing with cutting apparatus, the pieces can
be loaded into any conventional, batch or continuous coating
apparatus. The coating can then be applied in multiple layers until
the coating forms 30% of the finished product weight.
Examples 93-96
[0358] As mentioned above, Examples 93-96 provide multi-modality
gum compositions, which are center-fill gums having liquid center
regions. Different types of dualities are exemplified in these
liquid-fill gum compositions. In some examples, more than one
duality is present in the composition.
[0359] Additionally, several of the multi-modality gum compositions
provided in Examples 93-96 incorporate encapsulated components from
Examples 1-78 as one of the dual components in the compositions. In
particular, Example 93. includes encapsulated WS-23 from Example
13. Example 96 includes encapsulated malic acid from Example 6.
Examples of Multi-Modality Gums with Liquid Center-Fills
Cooling and Mint in Chewing Gum and Coating Portions and Tingling
and Spice in a Liquid Center
TABLE-US-00097 [0360] EXAMPLE 93 Gum Region Composition Component
Weight % Gum base* 28-42 Lecithin 0.1-0.25 Maltitol 52-55 Sorbitol
0 Lycasin .TM. 0 Mint flavor 2.50-3 Encapsulated WS-23 (from
Example 13) 0.08-0.1 Acidulants 1.2-1.7 Intense sweetener 3.4-3.9
*gum base may include 3% to 11% by weight of a filler such as, for
example, talc, dicalcium phosphate, and calcium carbonate (the
amount of filler in the gum base is based on the weight percent of
the gum region composition, for example, if a gum region
composition includes 5% filler, the amount of gum base will be 5%
less than the range recited in the table, i.e., from 23-37%)
TABLE-US-00098 EXAMPLE 93 Liquid-Fill Composition Component Weight
% Glycerin 63.00 Lycasin .TM. 29.26 Sorbitol solution 3.25 Sodium
carboxymethyl cellulose 0.08 Color 0.004 Cinnamon flavor 1.30 Jambu
oleoresin 0.06 Citric acid 3.00 Intense sweetener 0.05
TABLE-US-00099 EXAMPLE 93 Coating Composition Component Weight %
Maltitol 95.02 Bleached gum Arabic 3.32 Titanium dioxide 0.36 Mint
flavor 1.07 Unencapsulated WS-23 0.08 Intense sweetener 0.08 Color
0 Candelilla wax 0.08
[0361] A center-fill gum including three regions: liquid fill, gum
region and coating is prepared according to the compositions in the
Example 93 tables above. The gum region and coating compositions
both include WS-23, a cooling agent, whereas the liquid-fill
composition includes jambu oleoresin, a tingling agent. A duality
based on two distinct sensations therefore is present in the
center-fill gum. In addition, the gum region and coating
compositions both include mint flavor, whereas the liquid-fill
composition includes cinnamon flavor. A second duality based on the
mint-spice flavor distinction also is present in the center-fill
gum. Moreover, the WS-23 is present in both its encapsulated and
unencapsulated forms.
[0362] The composition for the gum region is prepared by first
combining talc, where present, with the gum base under heat at
about 85.degree. C. This combination is then mixed with the
maltitol, lecithin and other polyols for six minutes. The flavor
blends which include a pre-mix of the flavors and WS-23 are added
and mixed for 1 minute. Finally, the acids and intense sweeteners
are added and mixed for 5 minutes.
[0363] The liquid fill composition is then prepared by first
preparing a pre-mix of the sodium carboxymethyl cellulose,
glycerine, and polyols. This pre-mix is then combined with the
colors, flavors, jambu oleoresin, acids and intense sweeteners and
mixed.
[0364] The gum region and liquid-fill compositions are then
extruded together and formed into tablets by the process described
above at paragraphs [0104] to [0108]. The gum pieces each have a
total weight of approximately 2.2 g. In the final gum pieces, the
gum region is about 62% by weight, the liquid-fill is about 8% by
weight, and the coating is about 30% by weight.
[0365] Gum pieces that are prepared by Example 93 demonstrate no
noticeable loss of liquidity of the liquid-fill after accelerated
aging at 37.degree. C. for a three week period.
Indulgent Flavor in the Chewing Gum and Fruit Flavor in a Liquid
Center
TABLE-US-00100 [0366] EXAMPLE 94 Gum Region Composition Component
Weight % Gum base* 28-42 Lecithin 0.05-0.1 Maltitol 46-50 Sorbitol
5-10 Lycasin .TM. 0.25-0.5 Caramel flavor 2-2.26 Intense sweetener
3.4-3.9 *gum base may include 3% to 11% by weight of a filler such
as, for example, talc, dicalcium phosphate, and calcium carbonate
(the amount of filler in the gum base is based on the weight
percent of the gum region composition, for example, if a gum region
composition includes 5% filler, the amount of gum base will be 5%
less than the range recited in the table, i.e., from 23-37%)
TABLE-US-00101 EXAMPLE 94 Liquid-Fill Composition Component Weight
% Glycerin 63.00 Lycasin .TM. 29.49 Sorbitol solution 3.28 Sodium
carboxymethyl cellulose 0.15 Color 0.0004 Apple flavor 4.00 Intense
sweetener 0.02
TABLE-US-00102 EXAMPLE 94 Coating Composition Component Weight %
Maltitol 95.36 Bleached gum Arabic 3.32 Titanium dioxide 0.36
Caramel flavor 0.51 Warming agent 0.15 Intense sweetener 0.23
Candelilla wax 0.08
[0367] A center-fill gum including three regions: liquid fill, gum
region and coating is prepared according to the compositions in the
Example 94 tables above. The gum region and coating compositions
both include caramel flavor, which is an indulgent flavor. The
liquid-fill composition includes apple, which is a fruit flavor. A
duality based on two distinct flavors in different regions
therefore is present in the center-fill gum.
[0368] The center-fill gum is prepared by the same method set forth
for Example 93 above.
Warming in the Chewing Gum and Complementary Warming in a Liquid
Center
TABLE-US-00103 [0369] EXAMPLE 95 Gum Region Composition Component
Weight % Gum base* 28-42 Lecithin 0.05-0.1 Maltitol 45-55 Sorbitol
5-10 Lycasin .TM. 0.1-0.25 Cinnamon oil 2-2.50 Vanilla alcohol
n-butyl ether 0.08-0.1 Intense sweetener 2.9-3.4 *gum base may
include 3% to 11% by weight of a filler such as, for example, talc,
dicalcium phosphate, and calcium carbonate (the amount of filler in
the gum base is based on the weight percent of the gum region
composition, for example, if a gum region composition includes 5%
filler, the amount of gum base will be 5% less than the range
recited in the table, i.e., from 23-37%)
TABLE-US-00104 EXAMPLE 95 Liquid-Fill Composition Component Weight
% Glycerin 63.00 Lycasin .TM. 29.17 Sorbitol solution 3.24 Sodium
carboxymethyl cellulose 0.20 Color 0.004 Cinnamon oil 0.30 Cinnamic
aldehyde 0.06 Intense sweetener 0.02
TABLE-US-00105 EXAMPLE 95 Coating Composition Component Weight %
Maltitol 95.02 Bleached gum Arabic 3.32 Titanium dioxide 0.36
Cinnamon oil 1.07 Intense sweetener 0.08 Color 0 Candelilla wax
0.08
[0370] A center-fill gum including three regions: liquid fill, gum
region and coating is prepared according to the compositions in the
Example 95 tables above. The gum region composition includes
vanilla alcohol n-butyl ether, which is a warming agent. The
liquid-fill composition includes cinnamic aldehyde, which is
another warming agent. A duality based on two complementary warming
sensations therefore is present in the center-fill gum.
[0371] The center-fill gum is prepared by the same method set forth
for Example 93 above.
Sour Taste in Chewing Gum and Coating Portions and Sweet Taste in a
Liquid Center
TABLE-US-00106 [0372] EXAMPLE 96 Gum Region Composition Component
Weight % Gum base* 28-42 Lecithin 0.05-0.1 Maltitol 50-55 Sorbitol
0-5 Lycasin .TM. 0.1-0.25 Flavors 2-2.50 Encapsualted malic acid
(from Example 6) 0.7-1.2 Intense sweetener 3.4-3.9 *gum base may
include 3% to 11% by weight of a filler such as, for example, talc,
dicalcium phosphate, and calcium carbonate (the amount of filler in
the gum base is based on the weight percent of the gum region
composition, for example, if a gum region composition includes 5%
filler, the amount of gum base will be 5% less than the range
recited in the table, i.e., from 23-37%)
TABLE-US-00107 EXAMPLE 96 Liquid-Fill Composition Component Weight
% Glycerin 63.00 Lycasin .TM. 29.49 Sorbitol solution 3.28 Sodium
carboxymethyl cellulose 0.15 Color 0.0004 Flavors 4.00 Sucralose
0.02
TABLE-US-00108 EXAMPLE 96 Coating Composition Component Weight %
Maltitol 95.02 Bleached gum Arabic 3.32 Titanium dioxide 0.36
Flavors 1.07 Unencapsulated malic acid 0.08 Intense sweetener 0.08
Candelilla wax 0.08
[0373] A center-fill gum including three regions: liquid fill, gum
region and coating is prepared according to the compositions in the
Example 96 tables above. The gum region and coating compositions
both include malic acid, which has a sour taste, whereas the
liquid-fill composition includes sucralose and a sorbitol solution,
which both have a sweet taste. A duality based on two distinct
tastes therefore is present in the center-fill gum. In addition,
the malic acid is used in a greater amount in the gum region than
in the coating composition, thereby providing a second duality
based on different intensities of the sour taste.
[0374] The center-fill gum is prepared by the same method set forth
for Example 93 above.
Sweet and Sour Tastes in Gum Portion and in Chewy Candy Center
TABLE-US-00109 [0375] EXAMPLE 97 Ingredient Weight percent Chewing
gum composition containing sweeteners and acids Gum Base 28.875
Lecithin 0.20 Polyols 57.7498 Plasticizer 1.50 Flavor 5.7 Intense
sweeteners 1.9302 Food-grade acids 2.045 Encapsulated food-grade
acid 2.00 Total 100.00 Procedure: Gum is prepared in the following
manner: The gum base is melted in a mixer. The remaining
ingredients are added to the molten gum base. The melted gum base
with ingredients are mixed to completely disperse the ingredients.
Chewy candy center-fill composition with sweeteners and acids
Polydextrose 28.07 Maltitol 33.05 Water 8.13 Dextrin 7.43 Lecithin
0.74 Fat 5.57 Gelatin solution 3.34 Food-grade acids 13.00 Flavor
0.63 Intense sweetener 0.04 Total 100.00 Procedure: The
polydextrose, maltitol and water are boiled to 120.degree. C. until
dissolved. The lecithin and fat are added to the mixture under
high-speed mixing. The mixture is cooked to 94.5% solids and then
cooled down to 80-90.degree. C. The gelatin solution is then slowly
mixed in and the mixture is then cooled to 50.degree. C. The
flavor, color, and acids then are added. A center-fill slab is
prepared by first rolling the gum composition to 1.4 mm and rolling
the candy composition to 0.7 mm. A layer of gum is laid down. A
layer of candy is added to the gum layer and then another layer of
gum is placed on top of the candy layer. The mass is microwaved for
10 seconds and then fed through rollers multiple times and scored
into center-fill pieces in the form of a slab. A center-fill pillow
is prepared by first rolling a portion of the gum composition to
1.35 mm and punching it on a gum press to form the bottom cavity of
the center-fill gum. 0.4 g of the chewy candy composition is added
to the bottom cavity. Another portion of the gum composition is
rolled to 0.6 mm to form the top of the gum piece. The gum is
punched on the gum press to form the entire center-fill gum piece.
The total weight of the center-fill gum piece is 2.4 g. A
center-fill pellet is prepared by first rolling the gum composition
to 1.4 mm and rolling the candy composition to 0.7 mm. A layer of
gum is laid down. A layer of candy is added to the gum layer and
then another layer of gum is placed on top of the candy layer. The
mass is put through a scoring device for pellets to form individual
center-fill pellet gum pieces.
* * * * *